Digitric 100 Versatile, universal controller for all ... - ABB

Digitric 100 Versatile, universal controller for all standard applicationsInstallation, commissioning, configuration, parameterization, and operation

Manual 42/61-10010 EN Rev. 01

42/61-10010 EN

Digitric 100ns

hotocopying and diseminating it in any formhotomechanical or electronic reproduction ore permission of the copyright owner and non-

2 Digitric 100

Versatile, universal controller for all standard applicatio

ManualDocument No. 42/61-10010 EN

Edition: 10.01Revision: 01

Manufacturer:ABB Automation Products GmbHHöseler Platz 2D-42579 HeiligenhausGermany

Phone: +49 (0) 20 56 - 12 - 51 81Fax: +49 (0) 20 56 - 12 - 50 81

© Copyright 2001 by ABB Automation Products GmbHSubject to technical changes.

This technical documentation is protected by copyright. Translating, pwhatsoever - even editings or excerpts thereof - especially as reprint, pstorage on data processing systems or networks is not allowed without thcompliance will lead to both civil and criminal prosecution.

3

Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Content

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delivery state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 How to use this instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Visual orientation hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Hints for the configuration and parameterization table1.3 Hints for the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Description and application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2 Basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3 Operating and indicator elements on the front panel .3.4 Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 Controller outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Installing Digitric 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 Identifying the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 Choosing the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 Panel cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Connecting Digitric 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Signal connections of the basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2 Signal connections for modules and PC . . . . . . . . . . .5.3 Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1 Safety instructions in accordance with DIN VDE . . . .

42/61-10010 EN

6.2 Mounting the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

4 Digitric 100, Content

6.2.1 Mounting the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Modifying modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4 Adding input AI02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5 Disabling the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6 Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1 Operating elements on the Digitric 100 front panel . .7.2 LC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3 Alarm handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4 Automatic mode (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5 Manual mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 Ratio controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8 Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.1 Selecting the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.2 Starting the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.3 Displays during program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.4 Stopping the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8.5 Fast forward/backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.9 DDC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.9.1 Resetting (cancelling) the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10 Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.1 Manual station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.2 Setpoint station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.3 Ratio station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.10.4 Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11 Remote control (Profibus or Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Error information on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1 Indication 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.1 Parameter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.2 Inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.3 Effective PID parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

9.1.4 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89


9.1.5 Library identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1.6 Version display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2 Operate 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1 Parameterization menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.2 Selecting and changing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3 Parameter categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3.1 Instrument parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.3.2 Loop 1 parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4 Self-tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.3 Starting self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.4 Accepting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.5 Rejecting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.4.6 Cancelling self-tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1 Selecting the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2 Configuration table structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.3 Sequence of configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4 Changing the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 Exit configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.1.2 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2 AI definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.2 Sensor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.3 Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.4 Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42/61-10010 EN

13.2.5 mA inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117


13.2.6 Thermocouple input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.7 Resistance thermometer input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.2.8 Teletransmitter input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.3 Characteristic curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4 Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4.1 Setpoint 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4.2 Setpoint SP2 to SP4 = Ratio setpoint SR1 to SR3 . . .13.4.3 Computer setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.4.4 Setpoint ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5.1 Configuring programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5.2 Parameterizing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5.3 Programming table for a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6 Fixed-value control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6.1 Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6.3 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.6.4 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.7 Multi-component control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.7.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.7.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.8 Ratio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.8.1 Ratios and setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.8.2 Ratio control: Mixed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.9 Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.10 Parameter changeover/control (Gain scheduling) . . .13.10.1 Parameter changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.10.2 Parameter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11 State correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.1 Input and output routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.2 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.3 Configuration for gas and steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.4 Configuration for water mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.5 Configuration for drum water level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.6 Gas and steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

13.11.7 Water mass flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121ction results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132I01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

/Service/Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . 152


13.11.8 Drum water level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.11.9 Configuring an analog output for outputting state corre13.12 Control outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.12.1 Two-point controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.12.2 Three-point controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.12.3 Motorized valve control (Step controller) . . . . . . . . . .13.12.4 Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.12.5 Controller with relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.12.6 Continuous controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.1 Information (general) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.2 Hardware information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.3 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.3.1 Contrast of the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.4 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14.4.1 Example: Adjusting the Pt100, 2-wire, for AI01 . . . . .14.4.2 Example: Adjusting a teletransmitter, 1500 ohms, on A14.5 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.1 Plausibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.2 Master reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.3 Template (Quick configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 Quick configuration in the Template menu . . . . . .16.1 Setting the controller to the desired language . . . . . .16.2 Navigating through the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.3 Possible entries in the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.4 Basic variants in the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.5 Additional variants in the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.6 Alarm variants in the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16.7 Type of analog input AI01 and AI02 in the template . .16.8 Examples for template variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 Tables for menus: Indication2/Operate2/Selftune

42/61-10010 EN

18 Tables for the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

turer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199


19 Tables for the parameter setting menu . . . . . . . . . .

20 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1 Device errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1.1 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.1.2 Error details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.2 Error codes of the controller selftune routine . . . . . . .20.3 Error codes of the input/output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Serial interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CPU data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection, case, safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Binary inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 Packaging for transport or return to the manufac

9

Prefacetroller contains instructions for:

on for menu-guided configuration and param-e locally via the device’s front panel operating

rameterization program.

the IBIS-R+ program. The description of this

he factory setting is adjusted to the following

tting the controller to the desired language)ual. Customized versions are available upon

tomatically performs a selftest of the internal. Usually, no special attention has to be paid

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100

This documentation No. 62/61-10010 delivered with the Digitric 100 concommissioning, installation,configuration,parameterizationoperation

The following additional documents are available upon request:Operating instructions for IBIS-R, IBIS-R+ 42/62-50020Operating instructions for IBIS-R+ 42/62-50030Interface description (MODBUS) 42/62-50040Interface description (Profibus DP-V1) 42/62-50050

The operating instructions in this manual include all important informatieterization of he Digitric 100 controller. All necessary entries can be madelements, or remotely from a PC with the IBIS-R+ configuration and pa

The configuration options of the Digitric 100 menu are also available inprogram is beyond the scope of this manual.

Delivery stateThe devices are delivered off stock and without customized settings. Tfunctions: – Single-loop continuous controller– Input: 4...20 mA– Output: 4...20 mA– Language: German

(setting to english or french is shown in Section 16.1, SeThe factory setting and its definitions are described in detail in this manspecial request.

Switching on the deviceUpon power-on or return of the power after power failure the device aufunctions. The progress of the test program can be seen on the displayto this display.

42/61-10010 EN

1 How to use this instruction

scription

ons

dicator 7-1me name is lighted

me name is off

les

ructure

10 Digitric 100, Chapter 1 "How to use this instruction"

1.1 Visual orientation hints<Enter> Control buttons on the device front panel, with de<Ind><Menu>, <Enter> Buttons that are always enabled for operator acti[P-SP] Texts or text parts shown by the digital indicator[P-SP], A Flashing texts or text parts shown by the digital in

/8/ Reference to the numbers/fields specified in Fig.M, A Light emitting diode (LED) at the button of the saM, A

Menu, Enter Light emitting diode (LED) at the button of the saSxt External setpoint source Manual Operating mode

1.2 Hints for the configuration and parameterization tab

I InstrumentAI Analog inputAO Analog outputBIO, BI/BO Binary input/outputL1 Control loop No. 1SC State correctionPxx Programmer for program PO1 to P10P01 Parameter 1B01 Block 01Q01 Question 01ParameterizationL1-P01 Loop 1, Parameter 01 = Gain

ConfigurationI-B01, Q01 Instrument, block 1, question 1 = languageL1-B03-Q02 Loop 1, block 3, question 2 = multi component st

11

1.3 Hints for the configuration menubles in the device.

ngeover between AI01 and AI02 with simulta-

r AO01. AI02 is an optional input that can be

s input BI0x or as output BO0x, depending on

ts.

dule slot.

lug-in modules. In the device, the inputs and

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 1 "How to use this instruction"

The input values AIx, BIx and the outputs AO1 and BOx are global varia

The binary inputs can simultaneously trigger several functions, e.g. chaneous parameter changeover.

The binary outputs can output several logically ORed data.

Be careful when configuring the controller.

Input and output names and numbers

Basic unit:The analog inputs and outputs have the designations AI01 and AI02 oconnected to the main board.

The binary inputs/outputs are called BIO01 and BIO02. They are used athe configuration.

The relay outputs are called BO03, BO04 and BO05 and are NO contac

Modules:Besides the optional AI02 the Digitric 100 controller also provides a mo

Up to 4 analog or up to 6 binary input/outputs can be processed in the poutputs have the following designation:

AI1y Analog input No. y of the module in slot 1AI12 Input 2 of the module in slot 1BI16 Binary input 6 in slot 1BO14 Binary output 4 in slot 1

42/61-10010 EN

2 General safety instructions

process controller.

r transportation and storage, installation andnce.

ioning, operation and maintenance of this or

operation of electrical systems.

instructions are applicable in Germany. When the relevant regulations, standards and direc-ed.

EN 61 010-1 = IEC 1010-1 = DIN VDE 0411ratory Apparatus" and has been supplied in a cautions marked accordingly, which must bere safe operation. Otherwise, persons can beamaged or fail.

operating instructions please contact the ABB

f single control loops which can be connected

a sheets and in Section 21, Technical data of

12 Digitric 100, Chapter 2 "General safety instructions"

Safety instructions This chapter contains important instructions for your safety!Read and observe.

Instructions forproper use

These operating instructions are a reference manual for the Digitric 100

Proper and safe operation of the Digitric 100 controller requires propecommissioning by qualified personnel, proper use and careful maintena

Only qualified personnel who are familiar with the installation, commisssimilar devices are authorized to work on Digitric 100.Observe– the present operating instructions,– the safety instructions attached to the device– the relevant safety regulations and standards for the installation and

The regulations, standards and directives referred to in these operating using the Digitric 100 controller outside the German Federal jurisdiction,tives applicable in the country where the device is used must be observ

Digitric 100 has been designed, produced and tested in accordance withPart 1 "Safety Requirements for Electrical Measuring, Control and Labosafe condition. The present operating instructions contain warnings andfollowed by the user to retain the device in a safe condition and to ensuendangered or the device itself or other devices or equipment may be d

If you should need any information which is not contained in the present Service.

Proper use Digitric 100 is a single-loop compact controller for the instrumentation oto supervisory controllers and systems.

To ensure proper use, read and observe the "Technical data" in the datthis manual.

! STOP

!

13

3 Description and application

entation of single control loops. It is universal

/4...20 mA standard signals can be connectedon-linearized temperature transmitters the lin-

red in the device.

or actual value, electrically isolated.

r outputs, as required. They can be used as the controller (e.g. from manual to automatic

, input circuit, ratio control, etc.)

/4...20 mA standard signals can be connectedon-linearized temperature transmitters the lin-

red in the device.

process status and permit direct operator in-tpoints and output values and allow the oper-

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 3 "Description and application"

3.1 DescriptionThe industrial controller Digitric 100 is a compact controller for the instrumand can be used for both simple and complex control tasks.

3.2 Basic unit1 universal input for the process valueThermocouples, Pt100 resistance thermometers, teletransmitters and 0to the basic unit without requiring any hardware changes. When using nearization is performed in the controller. The appropriate linearization tables for all standard transmitters are sto

1 output 0/4-20 mA for the output signal or other values, e.g. setpoint

2 binary inputs/outputs 24 V DC which can be configured as inputs ocontroller outputs or alarm outputs, but also as inputs for switching overmode.)

3 relays for the output signal or alarm outputs, or for error messages.

One 2nd universal input for additional functions (e.g. external setpointThis input is optional and can be plugged onto the main board. Thermocouples, Pt100 resistance thermometers, teletransmitters and 0to the basic unit without requiring any hardware changes. When using nearization is performed in the controller. The appropriate linearization tables for all standard transmitters are sto

1 module slot for extending the inputs/outputs.

3.3 Operating and indicator elements on the front panelVarious operating and indicator elements inform the operator about thetervention. Numerical and plain text displays give an exact reading of seator to modify the settings if required.

42/61-10010 EN

3.4 Programmerpendent setpoint. Up to 10 programs with 15

one continuous and one switching output.

continuous output signals

accessed in the menu level. On this level the can be set.

be accessed in the menu level. On this leveligitric 100 can be configured either locally via. Remote configuration can considerably sim-g are to be configured.

14 Digitric 100, Chapter 3 "Description and application"

Every device contains a configurable programmer for defining a time-desegments each can be saved in the device.

3.5 Controller outputsS1 On/Off controller, PID actionS2 Controller for heating-off-cooling, optionally with two switching orM Motorized valve control (step control)C Continuous controller, optionally with split-range output with two

3.6 ParameterizationThe parameter level - which can be protected with a password - can beexisting device function parameters like controller gain or time constant

3.7 Configuration

List configurationThe configuration level - which can be protected with a password - canthe standard functions can be selected from a list saved in the device. Dits front panel operating elements, or remotely from a PC with IBIS_R+plify the configuration procedure if several devices with the same settin

15

4 Installing Digitric 100

and on machines. When choosing the instal-fied in the "Technical data" section.

evice in the installed state.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 4 "Installing Digitric 100"

4.1 Identifying the deviceSee the rating plate attached to the side of the device for the device ID.

4.2 Choosing the installation siteDigitric 100 is designed for front mounting in control rooms, in cabinetslation site observe the environmental and mechanical capabilities speci

WarningTo ensure full protection against accidental contact only use the d

42/61-10010 EN

4.3 Mounting

of 10 mm between theme proper ventilation

.

16 Digitric 100, Chapter 4 "Installing Digitric 100"

4.3.1 Panel cutout

Fig. 4-1 Panel cutout (dimensions in mm) Z-19166

• Panel cutout to DIN 43 700: 92+0.8 mm × 92+0.8 mm• When mounting the devices side by side, observe a minimum spacing• Provide for a sufficient spacing above and below the devices to ensur

Minimum spacing above and below: 40 mmNoteThe spacing between the devices must not be affected by the cables

17

4.3.2 Mounting instructions

ning clamp

91

.5

Z-20262

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 4 "Installing Digitric 100"

Fig. 4-2 Dimensional drawings (dimensions in mm)Z-19168 1 Fastening screw for tensioning clamp 2 Tensio

96

96

8 136

145

1 2

42/61-10010 EN

Mounting procedure

lockwise until you are able to snap in the ten-

until the tensioning clamp snaps in behind the is a conductive bonding between the housing,

etic compatibility (EMC) of the device.

18 Digitric 100, Chapter 4 "Installing Digitric 100"

Step Action

1. Remove at the front both screw covers.2. Turn the fastening screw for the tensioning clamp (1) counterc

sioning clamp (2) behind the panel. 3. Insert the device into the panel cutout from the front.4. Turn the fastening screw of the tensioning clamp (1) clockwise

front panel and retains the device reliably. Make sure that there the fastening screw and the panel.NoteThe conductive bonding is required to ensure the electromagn

5. Pull in both screw covers.

19

5 Connecting Digitric 100ns down for around 15 seconds. The progress

SA up to 1.5 mm2, for relays up to 2.5 mm2.

0

0

B

z-20

263

16 17 18 19 2120

Tele

Tele

BO03Relay

BO04Relay

BO05Relay

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 5 "Connecting Digitric 100"

Note When the device is switched on, an internal test routine is started and ruof the self-test is seen on the display.

5.1 Signal connections of the basic unit(see Fig. 5-1 and Fig. 5-2)Connect with pluggable screw-terminals for wire or stranded wire, wire C

Fig. 5-1 Signal connections of the basic unit(description see next page)

+24 V

mA

21 Vint

AI01+-

mA +-

+-

mA +-

B

B

8

B

9

13

12

13 13

11

9 9

10

7

6 6

7

9

10

11

13 13 13

11 11

10 10

9

7

6

ext

3

4

24 V

9

+-

BI01...BI02

1

2

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

6

5

4

3

15

BO02

BO01

AO01

Transmitter

Transmitter

Thermo couple

Thermo couple

Pt1002-wire

Pt1003-wire

Pt1004-wire

Pt1003-wire

AI02

Pt1002-wire

InputsOutputs

42/61-10010 EN

Description for Fig. 5-1

input or output))

ia terminal 1 or Pt100 (2-wire/3-wire) or rovide a low-resistance connection

inputs and outputs (is available only

20 Digitric 100, Chapter 5 "Connecting Digitric 100"

1 21 V int (optional)2 Input of power supply for binary outputs 3 Binary port 1 (a binary port can be used as binary 4 Binary port 25 Zero potential6 Analog input 17 Analog input 18 Analog input 19 Analog input 1+ 2 (AI02 optional)10 Analog input 2 (AI02 optional)11 Analog input 2 (AI02 optional)12 Analog input 2 (AI02 optional)13 Analog input 2 (AI02 optional)14 Analog output 115 Analog output 116, 17 Relay output (NO contact) BO0318, 19 Relay output (NO contact) BO0420,21 Relay output (NO contact) BO05AO01 Analog output 1 (0/4...20 mA)AI01 Universal inputAI02 Optional universal inputB The bridge is only required for transmitter supply v

teletransmitter supply via AI 02. The bridge must pbetween terminals 9 and 13 on the shortest way.

BI01,BI02 Binary inputs BO01, BO02 Binary outputsBO03,BO04,BO05 Relay outputs (NO contacts)Tele Teletransmitter21-V int. Optional supply for 2-wire transmitter and/or binary

if 2. universal input is installed).24-V ext. External power supply

21

5.2 Signal connections for modules and PC

le slotnnection (configuration interface) outputs clamp for connecting the cable shieldl connections for basic unitr connection


Overview

Fig. 5-2 Digitric 100, rear view with terminal strip

1 Modu2 PC co3 Relay4 Cable5 Signa6 Powe

Z-20262-1

4 6

5

3

2

1

42/61-10010 EN

Modules (can be retrofitted) overview of the available module types. The and is not considered as a module.

ID see Catalog number

E Fig. 5-5 62619-0346280

B Fig. 5-4 62619-0346250

F Fig. 5-6 62619-0346255

G Fig. 5-7 62619-0346281

H Fig. 5-8 62619-0346444

A Fig. 5-3 62619-0346254

M Fig. 5-11 62619-0346282

N Fig. 5-9 62619-0346252

P Fig. 5-10 62619-0346253

T Fig. 5-12 62619-0346263

U Fig. 5-14 62619-0346324

le Y Fig. 5-13 62619-0346326

Z – 62619-0346470


A module can be retrofitted at a later time. The following table shows anoptional analog input AI02 is plugged onto the main board of the device

Table 5-1 Module overview

Module type Designation

Inputs

AI4_mV=AE4_mV 4-fold thermocouple with electronic isolation

AI2_mA/mV_OI=AE2_mA/mV_TR

2-fold thermocouple or mA with opto isolation

AI4_PT_2W =AE4_PT_2L

4-fold Pt100 2-wire circuitry

AI2_PT_3/4W=AE2_PT_3/4L

2-fold Pt100 3/4-wire circuitry

AI4_F=AE4_F 4-fold frequency input

AI4_mA=AE4_mA 4-fold mA with electronic isolation

Binary inputs/outputs

BIO6_BIN=BEA6_BIN

6-fold binary input/output

Outputs

AO3_mA=AA3_mA

3-fold 20 mA

AO3_mV=AA3_mV

3 -fold 10 V

BO4_REL=BA4_REL

4-fold relay

Interfaces

RS 485 RS 485, independent of protocol, bus-compatible, transmission rate of up to 187500 bauds

RS 232 RS 232, independent of protocol, not bus compatib

PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP /DP-V1 (slave)

23

AI4_mA=AE4_mA: Analog input module 4 × mA

hermocouple / mV thermocouple/mV (-10...80 mV) by setting the

8)

Z-19

152


4 inputs, 0/4...20 mA, with electronic isolation

Fig. 5-3 Analog input module 4 × mAz-19152

AI2_mA/mV-OI=AE2_mA/mV_TR: Analog input module 2 × mA or t2 inputs, 0/4...20 mA with opto isolation; each input can be switched to jumper accordingly (see "Modifying modules").

Fig. 5-4 Analog input module 2 × mA or thermocouple / mV (z-1914

1

I1

A

+ + + +- - - -

I2 I3 I4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

42/61-10010 EN

AI4_mV=AE4_mV: Analog input module 4 × thermocouple

8 z-19

156

I4

7 8

Z-19

155


4 inputs, -10...80 mV, with electronic isolation

Fig. 5-5 Analog input module 4 × thermocouplez-19156

AI4_PT_2W=AE4_PT_2L: Analog input module 4 × Pt100, 2-wire4 inputs for 2-wire Pt100

Fig. 5-6 Analog input module 4 × Pt100, 2-wirez-19155

1

I1

E

I2 I3 I4

2 3 4 5 6 7

I1 I2 I3

1F 2 3 4 5 6

25

AI2_PT_3/4W=AE2_PT_3/4L: Analog input module 2 × Pt 100, 3-wire/4-wire

Z-1

949


2 inputs for 3-wire or 4-wire Pt 100 or teletransmitter

Fig. 5-7 Analog input module 2 × Pt100, 3-wire or 4-wirez-19149

1

I1

0 0

I2

3 4 5 6 7 82G

42/61-10010 EN

AI4_F=AE4_F: Frequency input module 4 × F

, only.

ed. Two inputs are linked and give a resulting

moving direction is recognized and set to zeroree inputs are linked to each other and give a

Increment Incrementwith zero point

AIx1AIx1

ZeroAIx3

disabled


4 frequency inputs

Fig. 5-8 Frequency input modules 4 × F (z-19194)

Table 5-2 1 if 0...20 kHz only input 1

The four inputs of a module can be used with the same measuring task

With increment measurement the rotation or moving direction is recognizinput.

With increment measurement with zero point recognition the rotation or via a third input. This permits an absolute travel/angel measurement. Thresulting input. The fourth input cannot be used in this case.

Input Frequency measurement

Time measurement

Pulsecounter

I1 AIx11 AIx1 AIx1

I2 AIx2 AIx2 AIx2

I3 AIx3 AIx3 AIx3

I4 AIx4 AIx4 AIx4

27

AO3_mA=AA3_mA: Analog output module 3 × mApen-circuit-proof

Z-1

9150

z-19

151


3 current outputs 0/4...20 mA on maximum 750 Ω, short-circuit-proof, o

Fig. 5-9 Analog output module 3 × mA

AO3_V=AA3_V: Analog output module 3 × V3 voltage outputs 0/2...10 V

Fig. 5-10 Analog output module 3 × V

1N

+ + +- - -

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

O2O1 O3

1P

+ + +- - -

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

O2O1 O3

42/61-10010 EN

BIO6_BIN=BE06_BIN: Binary input/output module (with electrical isolation)

t 1 A, cosϕ = 0.9plied to the same module, one relay betweenp distances between the individual circuits in

8 z-19

157

R4


6 binary inputs, can be configured as inputs or outputs

Fig. 5-11 Binary input/output module 6 × binaryz-19158

BO4_REL=BA4_REL: Binary output module 4 × relay4 relays with NO contacts

Fig. 5-12 Binary output module 4 × relayz-19157

WarningMaximum switching voltage 250 V AC, maximum switching currenIf extra low voltages (≤ 50 V) and mains voltages (≥ 100 V) are to be apthose must remain unused to provide the necessary air gaps and creeaccordance with EN 61 010-1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7TR

1

R2

R3

!

29

RS-232 interface module

ment see below


Fig. 5-13 RS 232 Interface modulez-19180

Connection of the interface via 9-pin SUB-D connector plug, pin assignSUB-D connector RS 232 interfacePin 2 RxD Pin 1 TxDPin 3 TxD Pin 3 RxDPin 5 GND Pin 5 Zero

42/61-10010 EN

RS-485 interface module (with electrical isolation)

be interrupted when the connector is un

ment see below

used for signal transmission, and an insulatednections and all other electrically isolated bus

additionally improves the EMI/RFI resistancee rear panel (see Fig. 5-2).

. The insulated wire in the data transmission(except the PC) are also electrically isolated.

l potential equalization cable with a sufficient


Fig. 5-14 RS 485 interface modulez-19181 The jumpers are only required if the interface link must not

plugged.

Connection of the interface via 9-pin SUB-D connector plug, pin assignSUB-D connector RS 485 interface modulePin 3 RxD Pin 1 R+Pin 8 RxD Pin 3 R–Pin 5 GND Pin 5 Zero

Note The bus cable is a shielded cable with at least 3 wires: a twisted wire pairwire for realizing the equipotential bonding between the "module zero" costations.

The cable shield is necessary to comply with the EMC requirements andof the interface. The cable shield is connected via the cable clamp to th

Potential equalization is vital to ensure proper operation of the interfacecable can only provide for potential equalization if all other bus stations

When using bus stations that are not opto isolated, usually an additionaCSA must be added.

PROFIBUSSee operating instructions 42/62-50050

31

5.3 Connecting the power supply

s with a rated voltage of up to 1000 V (DINer connections.

ent grounding conductor between the PEental contact.

V power supply is used.


WarningObserve the regulations for the installation of high-voltage systemVDE 0100) when selecting the cable material and installing the pow

Prior to making any other connections always provide an equipmconnector and protective earth, to ensure protection against accid

Note The protective earth conductor (PE) must also be connected if only a 24

! STOP

42/61-10010 EN

ower supply

ations for the installation of high-voltageed voltage of up to 1000 V (DIN VDE 0100)e cable material and installing the power to making any other connections alwaysent grounding conductor between the PEtective earth, to ensure protection against.

conductor (PE) must also be connected ifupply is used.

device always disconnect all hazardous volt- for power supply and on relay modules). Theg voltage of the device is seen on the rating side of the device.

ct the 24 V DC device to supply systemsage and protective separation from other


Fig. 5-15 115/230 V AC power connectionz-19161 L live conductor

N neutral conductorPE conductor

Fig. 5-16 24 V UC power connectionz-19163 DC Plus on L/L+

Zero on N/L-AC L/L+ and N/L-PE conductor

Connecting the p

WarningObserve the regulsystems with a ratwhen selecting thconnections. Priorprovide an equipmconnector and proaccidental contact

NoteThe protective earthonly a 24 V power s

WarningPrior to opening theages (mains voltagepermissible operatinplate attached to the

WarningExclusively connewith extra low voltcircuits.

!

!

!

33

A special, externally installed isolating switch in accordance with n 6.12,2 must be provided to disconnect thef required.ector "L“ or „L/L+“ has an internal fuse T 2.5

nal fuse protection is required for the control-

le screw terminals for wire or stranded wire,.

the device make sure that the rated operat-vice is identical with the mains voltage. Seeched to the side of the device for specifica-

switched on, an internal test routine is startedround 15 seconds. The progress of the self-isplay.


EN 61 010-1, sectiodevice from power iThe live power connA 250 V. No additioler. Connect via pluggabCSA up to 2.5 mm2

WarningPrior to switching oning voltage of the dethe rating plate attations.

NoteWhen the device is and runs down for atest is seen on the d

!

42/61-10010 EN

6 Retrofitting

e without using a tool - be aware that liver to opening the device and when workingre aware of the potential risks are allowed

evice has already been disconnected from

iately put the device out of operation and

device

e been damaged during transport

ains voltage for power supply and on relay

ing must be closed properly (rear panel in

34 Digitric 100, Chapter 6 "Retrofitting"

6.1 Safety instructions in accordance with DIN VDEWhen opening covers or removing parts - except if this is possiblparts may be exposed. Note that even connections may be live. Prioon the device always disconnect it from power. Only experts who ato work on the open device when it is live. Capacitors inside the device may still be charged, even when the dpower.If you are in doubt whether safe operation is still ensured, immedsecure it against being put in service by accident.

It must be assumed that safe operation is no longer ensured if the- has visible damages- does no longer work- has been stored under detrimental conditions- has been submitted to harmful transport conditions and may hav

6.2 Mounting the moduleWarningPrior to mounting the module switch off all hazardous voltages (mmodules).

During operation the module must be in the housing, and the housplace).

! STOP

!

35

6.2.1 Mounting the module

n interface)g the cable shield

roceed as described below:

ing by using a screw driver. and take it out from the back.

the board.

he housing until it snaps in at the upper and

odule, the cable shield should by electrically

-20262-1

5

3

2

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 6 "Retrofitting"

Fig. 6-1 Digitric 100, rear view with terminal strips1 Module slot 2 PC connector (configuratio3 Relay outputs 4 Cable clamp for connectin5 Signal connections, basic unit6 Power connector

Note If you want to install a module for the first time (no module exists yet), p

1. Unlock the rear panel at the upper and lower edge of the hous2. Remove the rear panel that carries the CPU and power boards3. Remove the cover plate from the rear panel.4. Slide the module into the guide notch and carefully plug it onto5. Plug the cover plate into the rear panel to lock the module. 6. Slowly and carefully insert the rear panel with the boards into t

lower edge.Note If the controller is equipped with a Modbus or Profibus DP interface m

connected with the rear panel through the cable clamps.

Z

4 6

1

42/61-10010 EN

6.3 Modifying modules

isolation.le /mV by setting the jumper accordingly.


Analog input module 2 × mA or thermocouple / mV2 inputs, 0/4...20 mA, or thermocouple and mV (-10...80 mV) with opto Each of the two inputs can be configured for 0/4...20 mA or thermocoup

Fig. 6-2 Analog input module 2 × mA or thermocouple / mVz-19185 Input 1: Input 2:

mA XB1A bridged mA XB2A bridgedmV XB1B bridged mV XB2B bridged

37

6.4 Adding input AI02

e and connected to the main board as piggy- open it to access the boards.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 6 "Retrofitting"

Fig. 6-3 Main board with piggyback board AI02

If required, the optional universal input AI02 can be added at a later timback board. Disconnect the controller from power, dismount it, and then

42/61-10010 EN

6.5 Disabling the password

ssword is active and valid. If the jumper is set

.1.2).l position.

will then download the new firmware revision


1. Switch off power.2. Dismount and open the device.If the jumper is set in such a way that it links pin 1 and pin 2, the set pato pins 2 and 3, the set password will be ignored.

3. Set the jumper accordingly (see Fig. 6-3).4. Close and mount the device.5. Switch on power.The password-protected menu levels are now freely accessible. 6. Read and, if applicable, change the password (see Section 137. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and then set the jumper back to its initia

6.6 Updating the firmwarePlease contact ABB Service if you need a firmware update. ABB Servicevia the optional RS 232 module.

39

7 Operation

25

14

15/22

17/23

10

19

21

20

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 7 "Operation"

7.1 Operating elements on the Digitric 100 front panel

Fig. 7-1 Operating elements on the Digitric 100 front panel(description see next page)

Digitric

Ind

A

M

EnterEsc

Menu

Sp-w

123

56

8

9

11

25

16

4

7

42/61-10010 EN

Description for Fig. 7-11 Text line

eters)

40 Digitric 100, Chapter 7 "Operation"

2 Digital indicator for process value PV3 Designation of the process value4 Dimension of the process value5 Digital indicator:

indicates setpoint SP in automatic modeand output value OUT in manual mode

6 Designation of the value indicated in 57 Dimension of the value indicated in 58 Alarm indicator 9 Indicator for programmer activity10 Remote control indicator11 Freely configurable binary messages (6 binary flags) 14 Setpoint changeover (see Section 7.6 “Setpoints“)15 Button for incrementing the values indicated in 5, 6 and 7 16 Toggle switch for indicators 5, 6 and 7 17 Button for decrementing the values indicated in 5, 6 and 719 Mode switch for selecting manual or automatic mode, with indicator LEDs 20 Button for accessing the configuration or parameterization level 21 Button for alarm acknowledgement and confirmation of data (configuration and param22 Up button for incrementing in manual mode23 Down button for decrementing in manual mode25 Cap for covering fastening elements for panel mounting

7.2 LC Display

The values seen in the “2nd line“ column of the table below can be accessed in two different ways:1. From left to right:

Press <Ind> button (several times).2. From right to left:

Press and hold <Ind> button

41

uotient numerator)

ator (continued on the next page)

Input circuit/ 1st line 2nd line Programmer

Err OUT ALi

PS PGt

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

Err OUT ALi

– OUT ALi – –

– – –PS Pt

Err OUT ALi

(Err) ALi PS Pt

hen theyon.


Table 7-1 Grayed indicators flash. These values are only displayed, but are currently not active.

PV Measured value (with ratio control: measured value in the q

SP1-SP4 Setpoints 1 to 4SR1 - SR3 Ratio setpoints 1 -3Sxt, Rxt External setpoint SPC, SRC Computer setpointP0x Programmer setpoint (indicated as P01 to P10)IC2 With ratio control: measured value in the quotation denomin

function Controller

Fixed value PV SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Multi components PV SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Multiplication PV SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Ratio (RPV, RSR) RPV SR1-SR3 Rxt SRC P0x SR

Ratio (PV, SR*IC2) PV SR1-SR3 Rxt SRC P0x SR

Fixed value/Ratio FV RPV SP1 SR1-SR3

Rxt SRC P0x SR

(RPV, SR) Ratio RPV SP1 SR1-SR3

Rxt SRC P0x SR

Fixed value/ratio FV PV SP1 SR1-SR3

Rxt SRC P0x SR

(PV, SR*IC2 Ratio PV SP1 SR1-SR3

Rxt SRC P0x SR

Extreme value (max, min, PV, SP) PV SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Load control - air same as ratio

Load control - fuel same as fixed value

Manual station PV – – – – –

Setpoint station – SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Ratio station PV SR1-SR3 Rxt SRC P0x SR

Positioner PV=OUTfb SP1-SP4 Sxt SPC P0x –

Alarm station PV (SP1-SP4) (Sxt) (SPC) (P0x) –

Setpoints are only indicated ware enabled in the configurati

42/61-10010 EN

Description for Fig. 7-1, continued from previous page: SR Setpoint active during ratio control (R* IC2) or (R*IC2)/(1-R)


Err Control deviationOUT Controller output or position feedbackALi Alarm limits AL1 to AL4, if enabled

Programmer:PS Currently executed program segment PSPt Program run time since startup

43

7.3 Alarm handling

arm or error occurs or an alarm value is ex-ng an operating cycle, “A“ appears in the bottom right corner of the

r alarm source is indicated in the first line of y instead of the TAG name,r> LED is lighted.

operating instructions displayed in the textority over error codes. As long as the operat-n is still unconfirmed, the alarm is only indi- flashing “A“. Alarm acknowledgement is nothis situation!

the exceeded alarm value to display the alarm value.

ging the alarmr> (standard configuration):

other alarm:is reset and the normal values are indicated.

extinguished, whether the alarm is still active

ther alarms are indicated in the same way as describedave to be acknowledged individually.


Fig. 7-2 Alarm messagez-19000

Fig. 7-3 Alarm value is set to 100.0 z-19001

When an alceeded duri– a flashing

display,– the error o

the displa– the <Ente

NoteUnconfirmedline have priing instructiocated by thepossible in t

Displaying Press <Ind>

Acknowledpress <Ente

If there is noThe display

The LED is or not.

If there are oMore alarmsabove and h

42/61-10010 EN

7.4 Automatic mode (A)

e active setpoint is seen on the digital indica-


Possible operator actionsWhen the controller is switched over from manual to automatic mode, thtor. Other values can be selected by pressing the <Ind> button.<M/A> Switch over from manual to automatic mode<SP-w> Switch over the setpoint (if configured)<> <> Increment/decrement the setpoint<Menu> Switch over to another menu level

45

7.5 Manual mode (M)

and <> buttons are defined either throughf the step controller, through the appropriateritical state - e.g. a higher furnace tempera-sing the < > button.

een changed over from automatic to manual OUT is shown by the digital indicator. Othery pressing the <Ind> button.

with double output (split range or heating-off-00% corresponds to the full output range of

normal characteristic curve)ds to 100 % coolingds to 0 % cooling and 0 % heatingds to 100 % heating

nsr: change the output signalld <Enter>, additionally press <>:t jumps to end value -5 %ld <Enter>, additionally press < >:t jumps to end value +105 % increment/decrement the setpointrom manual to automatic modehe setpoint (if configured)er menu level


Fig. 7-4 Output OUT is indicatedz-19020

The functions of the < >configuration or, in case owiring. Usually, a more cture - is reached by pres

After the controller has bmode, the output variablevalues can be selected b

In the case of controllers cooling) the display 0...1both outputs.

Example:Heating-off-cooling (with OUT = 0 % corresponOUT = 50 % corresponOUT = 100 % correspon

Possible operator actio< > <> OUT indicato

Press and hocontrol outpuPress and hocontrol outpu

<> < > SP indicator:<M/A> Switch over f<SP-w> Switch over t<Menu> Select anoth

42/61-10010 EN

7.6 Setpointsurces, provided that the controller has been

e by pressing the < > or <> button or

the digital indicator, independent of the num-

ive with a delay of 3 seconds. This means thatwitched over quickly.

SP4] ––>––↓

xt] ––<–––

SR3] ––>––↓

xt] ––<–––


The <SP-w> button can be used to toggle between several setpoint soconfigured accordingly.

Possible setpoint sources are:– setpoints SP1 to SP4 (SR1 to SR3) that can be selected on the devic– an external setpoint Sxt (Rxt) via analog input

or– a computer setpoint SPC (SRC) via serial interface

or– a programmer with 10 programs P01 to P10

Display in field /6/:

for ratio control

Unconfigured setpoints are suppressed.

Pressing the <SP-w> button will call up the current setpoint for display byber of available setpoints.

The setpoint is indicated immediately, but first flashes and becomes actonly the last setpoint selected becomes active when the setpoints are s

––– [SP1] ––>–– [SP2] ––>–– [SP3] ––>--–[↑––––<––– [POx] –––<–– [SPC] ––<–– [S

––––––––––>–– [SR1] ––>–– [SR2] ––>--–[↑––––<––– [P0x] –––<–– [SRC] ––<–– [R

47

7.7 Ratio controller

r controls

the configuration,

r can output the actual ratio to an analog out-f configured accordingly.

d SR displays are configured, the ratio set-in the fields /5/, /6/ and /7/ of the digital indi-et.

ordingly, several setpoint sources (SR1 tor program generator) can be selected byw> button. tual ratio is indicated in the fields /2/, /3/ and

cess value) SR set ratio( ) FlowAFlowB-----------------= =

V SR FlowAFlowA FlowB+-----------------------------------------==


Fig. 7-5 Ratio control

Fig. 7-6 Display RPV and SR1, z-19018 SR1 is adjustable

The ratio controlle

or, depending on

The ratio controlleput (0/4...20 mA) i

When the RPV anpoint is indicated cator and can be s

If configured accSR3, Rexternal opressing the <SP-The measured ac/4/.

Flow A

Flow B

F

FFC

F

Z-19068

RPV(ratio pro

RP

42/61-10010 EN

SP displays are configured, the calculated is indicated in the fields /5/, /6/ and /7/. /4/ indicate the measured actual value of

utton to call up the SR1value in the display and then change it.


Fig. 7-7 Process value PV = flow A and SP = setpoint flow A

z-19019

Fig. 7-8 SR1 is adjustablez-190051

When the PV andsetpoint of flow A The fields /2/, /3/, flow A.

Press the <Ind> bfields (/5/, /6/, /7/)

49

7.8 Programmergrams with 15 segments each can be saved.

cting the program

er is configured, the [Pxy] display can be se-ng the <SP-w> button. The flashing Pxy dis-e number of the currently selected program.

<> to toggle between up to 10 saved pro-10).

ting the program

splay has stopped flashing, the program canssing the <Enter> button. The question if the started appears for 3 second in the text line.nter>. The question mark is replaced with anrk for a few seconds. If the selection is notEnter> within 3 seconds, the selection is ig-am selection is enabled again.


A programmer can be configured in the controller. Up to 10 different proRefer to Section 12, Configuration for details about setting the values.

Fig. 7-9 Program has been selected,z-19002 but not yet started

7.8.1 Sele

If the programmlected by pressiplay indicates th

Press < > or grams (P01 to P

Fig. 7-10 Start?z-19004

7.8.2 Star

Once the Pxy dibe started by preprogram is to beConfirm with <Eexclamation maconfirmed with <nored and progr

42/61-10010 EN

lays during program execution

button to switch over the display, either whilebeing executed or after it has stopped. Be-t setpoint the following items can be indicat-

entime


Fig. 7-11 Displaying the current z-19006 program setpoint 300.0 °C

Fig. 7-12 Program is in the 11th segmentz-19007

Fig. 7-13 Program run time so far 2h:17min:02sz-19008

7.8.3 Disp

Press the <Ind>the program is sides the currened:

– Program segm– Program run t

51

the program

utton is pressed again once the program is for the system stop seen here appears.

answered with yes by pressing the <Enter>n is shown for 3 seconds.

ped, and the [Prgm] indicator flashes. Thelaced with an exclamation mark for a short


Fig. 7-14 Question: Stop program?z-19009

Fig. 7-15 Programmer has stoppedz-19011 Program (Prgm) is flashing

7.8.4 Stopping

When the <Enter> brunning, the question

When the question isbutton, a confirmatio

The program is stopquestion mark is reptime to confirm.

42/61-10010 EN

ard/backward

been stopped, a fast forward/backward runpressing the < > or <> button. Actuating shift the program forward to values later inon is pressed, the fast forward action is con-.

has run forward can be derived from the set-dicator or the time indicator.

of the program can be started by pressing the


Fig. 7-16 Fast forward indicationz-19012

Fig. 7-17 Fast backward indicationz-19013

7.8.5 Fast forw

When a program hascan be achieved by the < > button willtime. When this buttfirmed in the display

How far the programpoint, the segment in

A fast backward run <> button.

53

e of a computer failure the Digitric controller

the serial interface.

g (cancelling) the program

rted after it has been run down completely, itn the 1st segment. No reset is required in this

a be reset or cancelled by pressing the

wered with yes by pressing the <Enter> but-, the program is reset to the start. The mes-rs for a short time.

pts to switch during a running program to an-SP1) by actuating the <SP-w> button, thens“ appears in the display for 3 seconds, see


7.9 DDC controlWith DDC control a supervisory computer provides for control. In casbumplessly takes over control.

Possible operating modes LED is off

LED is flashing with 0.5 to 1 Hz⊗ LED is flashing with 2 Hz

LED is onCR The computer is ready, i.e. there is regular data traffic via

M, A LEDs to the side of button 19 on the front panel (Fig. 7-1)

Fig. 7-18 Question: Reset?z19014

Fig. 7-19 During running program switching to other setpoints is not possible

z19-016

7.8.6 Resettin

If a program is restastarts automatically icase.

A stopped program c<SP-w> button.

If the question is anston within 3 secondssage “Reset!“ appea

If the operator attemother setpoint (e.g. warning “Program ruFig. 7-19.

42/61-10010 EN

nnot be switched to DDC mode.

A flashes with low frequency. In “automatic“

e at any time.

trol in the configured mode. cy.

uency.

ighted permanently.

DDC configuration DDC configurationatic backup mode

modeLED

RBM A

0 0

disabled 0 1

11

ode

⊗ 01


No computer ready signal (CR = 0)As long as no computer ready (CR) signal is available, the controller ca

Computer ready (CR = 1)The changeover to DDC operation is enabled. In “manual“ mode LEDbackup mode LED M flashes with low frequency.

It is possible to switch from DDC operation to manual or automatic mod

Computer not readyIf the CR signal is not received any longer, the controller takes over conIn backup mode "manual" LED A flashes with increased frequenIn backup mode "automatic" LED M flashes with increased freqIt is not possible to switch over to another mode (non-DDC).The LED of the disabled mode flashes. The LED of the active mode is l

with manual backup mode with autom

Operating modeLED

CRM A

Manual 0Automatic 0DDC disabled 0Manual 1Automatic 1DDC 1Backup mode

M-backup ⊗ 0M-backup 1

Operating

Manual

Automatic

DDC

Manual

Automatic

DDC

Backup m

M-backup

M-backup

55

7.10 Stations

l station is a controller that can be used inde only.

s that can be selected by pressing <Ind> doetpoints or the control deviation in this mode.cator can indicate a measured value whichitored for limit values. n of the manual station depends on the re-figuration.

ionnual station the control output can be set

ll output types of the controller are possible.

omatic station (not step controller) mode, this station applies an externally fed signal to the output. It is possible to switchual mode and set the output manually.ut is possible.

l station (no step controller)anual station combines the functionality ofstation with the manual function of the DDC

88

88

8


7.10.1 Manual station

Fig. 7-20 (z-19026)

The manua“manual“ moAll indicatornot display sThe PV indican be monThe operatiospective con

Manual statWith the mamanually. A

Manual/autIn automaticcontinuousover to manNo step outp

DDC manuaThe DDC mthe manual controller.

AM

DDC

Y

X8 8 8 8 8

Manual-automatic station

Output

C, M , S

Operating modeLED

CRM A

Manual 0

DDC disabled 0

Manual 1

DDC 1

Backup mode

M-backup 0

M-backup 1

42/61-10010 EN

7.10.2 Setpoint station

t station generates setpoints and outputs...20 mA signal.

s for the process value or control deviation.

Sp-w> can be used to switch between differ-sources and the program generator, if config-

tion multiplies an input signal with a setableR. The input signal is treated as a measured

values may be set.

SR * input) is available as output signal.

88

88

8

88

88

8

88

88

88

88

88

88

88

8

88

88

8

88

88

88

88

88


7.10.3 Ratio station

Fig. 7-21

The setpointhem as 0/4

All indicatorare disabled

The button <ent setpoint ured.

Fig. 7-22 (z-19034)

The ratio staratio factor Svalue. Limit

The signal (

8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8 88 8 8 8 8

AOxy

P0x

SPCSxt

SP-wSP4SP3SP2SP1

Set point station z-1

90

31

*

8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8 8

8 8 8 8 88 8 8 8 8

P0x

Sxt

PV

SRC

SP-w

SR*PVSR3SR2SR1

Ratio station

(1-SR)*PV

z-19

034

57

7.10.4 Positioner

ks the actuator position (valve position) to ansition is indicated on the controller as the pro-

ndicator is active. The control buttons on thent panel are disabled, with some exceptions.

erator actions

Permits to switch over the displayAccesses the configuration menu, among other reasons to start remote control.

u> to switch to the menu level from which re-l can be disabled.


The positioner is a motorized valve controller (step controller) which tracexternal setpoint. This task requires position feedback. The returned pocess value PV and the position feedback OUT.

7.11 Remote control (Profibus or Modbus)

Only remote control

Fig. 7-23 Remote control is active z-19035

The [Rem] icontroller fro

Possible op

<Ind> <Menu>

Press <Menmote contro

42/61-10010 EN

8 Error information on the display

Configuration

cked through a binary I-B02-Q01I-B02-Q02

figuration. L1- B01-Q05

ment (e. g. no Pt100

d with constant current,

require an adjustment.

hed to exclusive remote I-B04-Q01

it must be enabled via I-B04-Q01

58 Digitric 100, Chapter 8 "Error information on the display"

Table 8-1 Error information

Operating notes Meaning

locked by BI Access to parameterization, configuration, service, and supervisor level is bloinput.

generate After configuration the instrument is busy with the program generation.

locked for SP Self-tuning is blocked for this control loop. It can only be released via the con

no adj. possible The selected input has not been activated for the type intended for the adjustinput).This message is displayed for mA position feedback or remote transmitters feif the difference between start and end value is smaller than 10%.

no adjustment The configured module does not permit an adjustment respectively does not

local only The instrument has only been configured for local operation. It cannot be switcoperation.

remote only The instrument has been configured for remote operation. For local operationmenu “Operate 2” or via the configuration.

59

Error message Cause Remedy

sappear within a few seconds you can try to g off the supply voltage for approximately 60 actory settings must be restored via the nfiguration must be reloaded via IBIS_R .

sappear within a few seconds after initiate a restart by switching off the supply 0 s. If the error persists, the factory settings pervisor” menu or the configuration must be

slot 1 and register the module

the display with <Enter> and change it.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 8 "Error information on the display"

Table 8-2 Error information

Error xxxx An error occurred while processing the program.The number is intended as help for the service.

If this message does not diinitiate a restart by switchins. If the error persists, the f“supervisor” menu or the co

IP stopped! Processing has been temporarily stopped.This error occurs during downloading.

If this message does not didownloading you can try tovoltage for approximately 6must be restored via the “sureloaded via IBIS-R+ .

Slot 1! When downloading a configuration the configuration request a module that is located in the instrument.

Insert the correct module in(I-B11-Q01 = 1).

invalid resp. The response entered may be incompatible with other existing settings.Enter is activated together with this message.

Get the invalid response on

42/61-10010 EN

9 Menu structure

Z-202521

2. Menu level

see attached tables

see attached tables

see attached tables

see attached tables

see attached tables

see attached tables

see attached tables

60 Digitric 100, Chapter 9 "Menu structure"

Fig. 9-1 Menu structure1 Confirm selection, go down one menu level2 Change or confirm input, go down one menu level3 Go up one menu level without change(press 3 s → main operating level)4 From main operating level to menu5 Move sideways within one menu level

EscMenu

Enter1

2

3

4

5EscMenu

Pas

swor

d -

chec

kif

inC

ON

FI /

INS

TR

UM

EN

T /

B20

def

ined

Ope

ratio

n le

vel

1. Menu level

Indication 2

Operate 2

Selftune

Parameter

Configuration

Service

Supervisor

61

Indication 2ings of the controller, but you cannot change

figured functionality. During parameterization

ctuator output type).are frozen). (See also tables and section 12.)

o tables). an expert manner, the instrument is rendered

Template (see also tables and Section 15,

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 9 "Menu structure"

In this menu you can view all parameters, measuring values, and settthem (see also tables and section 9.1).

Operate 2In this menu you can toggle between local and remote operation.(See also tables and section 9.2)

SelftuneSelf-tuning is enabled in the configuration menu under

CONFI / LOOP1 / B01 / Q05After enabling it can be used without knowing a password (see also tables and section 11.4).

ParameterThis menu contains the settings of the parameters required for the conthe control action stays on (see also tables and section 11).

ConfigurationThis menu contains sub-menus for instrument function definition (e. g. aDuring configuration the control action is switched off (actuator outputs

ServiceThis menu contains sub-menus for calibration, Adjustment, etc. (see alsCalibration is only required in exceptional cases. If it is not executed in unusable (see also tables and Section 14, Service).

SupervisorThis menu contains the sub-menus: Master reset, Plausibility, and Supervisor).

42/61-10010 EN

9.1 Indication 2

u you can display all parameters of the

changes can only be performed via theotected parameterization menu.


9.1.1 Parameter display

Fig. 9-2 Parameter displayz-19104

In this meninstrument.

Parameter password-pr

63

9.1.2 Inputs/outputs

you can display all binary and analog inputs used in the application.

r> to switch to the next menu level.

analog input AI01 is displayed in the first lineed scale.

line shows the PV. In simple control taskse measuring value both values are identical, different decimal point position.

and <> to select the desired input or output.

nary input BI01 has the value


Fig. 9-3 Start menu for displaying -19081 inputs and outputs

Fig. 9-4 Analog input AI01 = 250.5 mbarz-19082

Fig. 9-5 Binary input BI01 = 1z-19083

In this menuand outputs

Press <Ente

The value ofof the select

The bottomwith only onpossibly with

Press < >

Currently, bilogical “1”.

42/61-10010 EN

9.1.3 Effective PID parameter

you can display the effective PID parametersment.

changes can only be performed via theotected parameterization menu.

enu option ”Identification“ displays thee selected control loop.


9.1.4 Identification

Fig. 9-6 PID parameter displayz-19104

In this menuof the instru

Parameter password-pr

Fig. 9-7 The display shows an example of the z-19065 information when called from Loop 1.

Selecting mfunction of th

65

9.1.5 Library identification

uration is based on library 3.6.0. Thisis only relevant for processing the

with IBIS-R+.

rmware version used in the instrument itself. quired to know this version number when IS-R PC software.


9.1.6 Version display

Fig. 9-8 Library identificationz-19080

The configinformation configuration

Fig. 9-9 The firmware (instrument software) has the z-19042 index 01.250

This is the fiIt may be reusing the IB

42/61-10010 EN

9.2 Operate 2

ment has been configured exclusively foration, the remote operation can be disabled– e. g. for emergency intervention – via menu

on the configuration the following displayn selecting the menu option:

d for remote operationn cannot be changed.

ration means that values are input to theia Modbus RTU respectively PROFIBUS DP.

ration is activatedration “Rem” can be toggled to local opera-

n “Toggle to local operation?“ cal?" is confirmed with <Enter> or negated

ent is toggled to local operation the keys are [Rem] starts flashing.


Fig. 9-10 Not intended for remote operationz-19041

Fig. 9-11 Remote operation is activatedz-19040

If the instruremote opertemporarily “Operate 2”.

Depending appears whe

Not intendeThe operatio

NoteRemote opeinstrument v

Remote opeRemote opetion. The questio= "Rem>Lowith <Esc>.

If the instrumenabled and

67

ration is deactivatedration is – temporarily – switched off. Pressrestore the operating condition “Remotes defined by the configuration. Then, thean only be remote-operated. flashing.


Fig. 9-12 Remote operation is deactivatedz-19039

Remote opeRemote ope<Enter> to operation” ainstrument c[Rem] stops

42/61-10010 EN

10 Password protection

ord protection has been configured (I-B20),nter a password to access the protectedanging the predefined value “00000”.

rd is a 5-digit number.

ft a flashing (changeable) field:d>ange digit:> and <>

nfirm password:ter>

password is correct, the desired level isu can now switch between all levels of the

without having to re-enter the password B20-Q01).

ord is not correct, the main operating level isain.

e lock has been configured (I-B02-Q01) andnput is set, the message “locked by BI” ishen attempting to open a protected level.

e is displayed for 3 s, then the operating levelally switched back.

68 Digitric 100, Chapter 10 "Password protection"

Fig. 10-1 Input of password. 1st field from the rightz-19101

Fig. 10-2 Locking the parameterization and z-19103 configuration level via binary input

If the passwyou must elevels, by ch

The passwo

1. Shi<In

2. Ch<

3. Co<En

When the entered. Yomenu system(Question: I-

If the passwdisplayed ag

If a hardwarthe binary idisplayed w

The messagis automatic

69

Cancelling the password input

rily rearranging a jumper within the instrument.tion refer to section 6.5.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 10 "Password protection"

Cancel with <Esc>

Forgotten passwordIf a password is no longer known, the password can be reset by temporaFor this action the control loop must be switched off. For further informa

42/61-10010 EN

11 Parameterization operation.

he parameter changes could interfere with the

4. menu level

1 1.0000

Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

Ind

confirm

abbort

70 Digitric 100, Chapter 11 "Parameterization"

During parameterization the instrument in online, i. e. all functions are in

During parameterization the instrument should be set to manual, since tautomatic operation.

11.1 Parameterization menu

Fig. 11-1 Parameterization menu

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu level 3. menu level

Indication 2 INSTRUMENT 1 GAINOperate 2 LOOP1 2 RESET TIME TrSelftune PROGRAM 1 3 DERI. TIME TdParameter PROGRAM 2 4 GdConfiguration . . . . . 5 MANUAL RESET1Service PROGRAM 9 . . . . . . . . .Supervisor PROGRAM 10 199 TAG NAME

EscMenu

EscMenu

Enter Enter Enter

edit

EscMenu

EscMenu

71

11.2 Selecting and changing parameters

to parameterization menu:enu>quired, enter password (procedure ording to items 4 through 8):

ect parameter:> and <>ble parameter change:ter>

position flashes.

ange the flashing position: d>ft the decimal point:ss and hold <Ind>ange value:> and <>ept changed parameter (including decimal

nt change):ter>

card changes:c>

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 11 "Parameterization"

Fig. 11-2 Selecting parametersz-19112

Fig. 11-3 Gain selected for changingz-19104

(Menu )

1. Go<M

2. If reacc

(Menu )

3. Sel<

4. Ena<En

(Enter )

A parameter

5. Ch<In

6. ShiPre

7. Ch<

8. Accpoi<EnorDis<Es

Enter .

42/61-10010 EN

11.3 Parameter categoriesn) have the following headings:

n tables. The dimension (EU) depends on the

nfiguration (e. g. AI-Bx-Q02).

ugh L1-P29

l output OUT2 (e. g. “Cooling”)ain 2 set time 2 Trrivative time 2 Tdrivative gain 2 Gd

anual reset 2 MRoling or split-range, if available).ired parameters from range P06 through P21isplay. The values currently in effect are alsoID parameters” if parameter control (Gain

art and end value of the values (P06 throughr control.


The parameter tables in these instructions (Section 11, Parameterizatio

Instrument all parameters valid for the entire instrument.Loop 1 parameters specific for a control loop.Program 1-10 Programs 1 through 10 for the programmer(refer to section “programmer”).

11.3.1 Instrument parameterization

The parameterization for the instrument consists of the four linearizatioconfigured application. It is not shown in the tables.

The tables can only be parameterized if the tables are linked into the co

11.3.2 Loop 1 parameterization

PID parameters (L1-P01 through L1-P19) and possibly L1-P25 thro

For a standard PID controller, only these parameters are accessibleControl output OUT1 Contro01 Gain 25 G02 Reset time Tr (only if integral part present) 26 Re03 Derivative time Td (only if derivative part present) 27 De03 Derivative gain Gd (only if derivative part present) 28 De05 Manual reset MR (if no integral part present) 29 MThe OUT2 parameters are valid for a 2nd control output (heating-off-coIf a parameter control has been configured (L1-B02-Q7...Q18), the requ(OUT1) resp. P30 through P37 (OUT2) are in effect and visible on the dshown in P01 through P05 in menu option “Indication 2”/“Actual Pscheduling) is active.

For parameter changeover, a binary input is used to toggle between stP21 for OUT1, P30 through P37 for OUT2) parameterized for paramete

73

Self-tune L1-P125 - L1-P128ng, in order to guarantee that illegal operating

t function has been configured (L1-B01-Q02).

y setting render them ineffective.

Q05, Q06, and L1-B10-Q03, Q05).

nd their change rate. The factory settings of

e been configured as parameters.

eter P96 defines the time period during which

/min:


Using parameters P125 through P128 you can define limits for self-tunisituations cannot occur.

Control output (parameters L1-P55 through L1-P72)Parameters P55 through P72 are only visible if the corresponding outpu

Control signal limits (P67 through P70) are always available. The factor

The safety values P71, P72 depend on the configuration (L1-B07-Q03,

Setpoint values (parameters L1-P75 through L2-P84)Parameters P75 through P80 define the limits for the setpoint values aparameters P77 through P80 render them ineffective.

Parameters P81 through P84 are only visible, if the setpoint values hav(L1-B05-Q02 ff.)

Alarm values (parameters L1-P91 through L1-P96)If alarm value has been configured for monitoring the change rate, paramthe value set by P91 through P95 must not be exceeded as change.

There are only three values possible for P96:1 = 0:00:01 h = 1 second2 = 0:01:00 h = 1 minute3 = 1:00:00 h = 1 hour

Example:Alarm value 1 is supposed to switch at a change rate of more than 15°CAL1 L1-B08-Q01 = 11 (AL1: function dx/dt)

L1-P96 = 2 minL1-P91 = 15 15 (°C, if SP in °C)

42/61-10010 EN

Input evaluations (parameters L1-P101 through L1-P104)

ne the limits of the ratio setpoint and the bias.

urbance feedforward.

acters). 9...0, space, – t.

is exited and you move back to the operation


These parameters are explained in the description of the input circuits.

Input ratio (parameters L1-P115 through L1-P117)These parameters are only effective in ratio input circuits. They determi

Disturbance feedforward (parameter L1-P120, L1-P121)These parameters determine the transition function of a differential dist

TAG name (parameter L1-P199)

Fig. 11-4 Parameter 199 “TAG name” selected for changingz-19105

Parameter 199, the TAG name, is set in the text line (maximum 12 char< > and <> allow the setting of A...Z, a...z, +, ., /, %, _, ), (, °,<Enter> terminates the input and takes over the text inpu<Ind> moves the input position.

Exit parameterization level<Menu> jumps one level up in the menu system. If you press and hold this key longer than 5 seconds, the menu systemlevel.

75

11.4 Self-tunent for some time. Before starting selftune this

NG, the temperature of the controlled systemr COOLING can be activated.l) and positioners. (See also tables.)

ocess at the beginning of the self-tuning. This

nd the first parameters. For controlled processameters more precisely.

nu, these parameters must be adapted to the

occurs in the controlled process, without the

ected control compensation time Tg. Factory

mplete jump response (in either direction), noation.

ator pulse is decreased to the initial value.

lied to the process the controller reduces this


Notes Self tuning should only be started, if the process value has been constacan be achieved in manual mode.

For parameterizing a controller with the function HEATING-OFF-COOLImust be high enough for cooling to become active, before self-tuning foSelf tuning cannot be performed for motorized valve control (step contro

11.4.1 Procedure

For exciting the controlled process a jump is applied to the controlled prjump is taken away after an adjustable duration.From this jump the controller recognizes the type of controlled process awith compensation another jump is applied, in order to calculate the par

11.4.2 Parameters

Four parameters have been defined for self-tuning in the parameter mecontrolled process, if need arises:

Jump L1-P125This value must be selected in such a way that a detectable change controlled process operating in a critical range. Factory setting: +5.0 %.

Max. jump duration L1-P126Duration of first jump. The duration should be at least 1/10 of the expsetting: 0.25 min (15 s).

If the duration of the first test jump is long enough to accommodate a cofurther jump will occur, not even for controlled processes with compens

Max. pos. control deviation L1-P127Max. neg. control deviation L1-P128If the control variable is likely to exceed the defined range, the first actuFactory setting: 99999 EUIf – for controlled processes with compensation – a second jump is appsecond jump in such a way that the limits will no longer be exceeded.

42/61-10010 EN

11.4.3 Starting self-tuning

ll up self-tuning:enu> < > < >

f-tuning can only be started if it has been bled in the configuration menu (L1-B01-Q05 ) If self-tuning is locked, the message Selftune” is displayed.

r selecting the menu option lftune”, rt self-tuning:ter>


Fig. 11-5 Self tuningz-19043

Fig. 11-6 Locked for self-tuningz-19143

Fig. 11-7 Start self-tuning?z-19047

1. Ca<M

2. Selena> 0“no

3. Afte“Sesta<En

77

jumps back to the main operating level. Now,n is possible. The display in the text line of activated self-tuning toggles between TAGelf-tuning”.

entionarameters are determined, the loop is in

ration. Actuator output and setpoint must not manually in this situation. Manual operationr emergency intervention.

ning is finished, the display changes. When re-entered, (figure 11-6, then figure 11-11),d values are offered for confirmation.

itch between display of Gain, Tr and Td:>,<>change the displayed value:ter>

>,<>

ing:


Fig. 11-8z-19044

Fig. 11-9z-19045

Fig. 11-10z-1952

The display loop selectiothe loop withname and “S

AttWhile the pmanual opebe changedis enabled fo

When self-tuself-tuning isthe calculate

4. Sw<

5. To <En<

or

Exit self-tun<Esc>

!

42/61-10010 EN

11.4.4 Accepting the parameters

termined values have been displayed andquired, they can be accepted.

ept values:ter>

ers with two actuator functions HEATING-NG or split-range you must decide whethered parameter set is to be used for HEATING or COOLING (Accept -> 2).


Fig. 11-11 Accept ->1?z-19055

Fig. 11-12 Accept ->2?z-19056

After the dechange, if re

1. Acc<En

For controllOFF-COOLIthe determin(Accept ->1)

79

11.4.5 Rejecting the parameters

ject parameters:ter>

sly set values are retained.

ning is executing, you can cancel self-tuningg the menu level and opening the self-tuning.

ncel self-tuning:ter>

not cancel self-tuning:enu>jumps back to the menu level.


11.4.6 Cancelling self-tuning

Fig. 11-13 Reject?z-19057

1. Re<En

The previou

Fig. 11-14 Cancel self-tuning?z-19046

While self-tuby re-enterinmenu option

1. Ca<En

or

2. Do<M

The display

42/61-10010 EN

12 Configurationthe controller via front keys in the menu "con-

oftware IBIS-R.enu "template". You will find a detailed des-

r many applications.

1

enu level Editing

AI01 4. . .20mA 1 AI01 0. . .20mAAI01-LINEAR 2 AI01 4. . .20mAAI01-DIM NONE 3 AI01 TCAI01-SCAL.LO 4 AI01 RTD-2WAI01-SCAL.HI 5 AI01 RTD-3WAI01-FILTERT. 7 AI01 POT.150AI01-FAIL.VAL 8 AI01 POT.1500AI01-FAIL.VALAI01-ERR=N.BOAI01-ERR=N.FL

EscMenu

Enter

Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

confirm

abbort

edit

80 Digitric 100, Chapter 12 "Configuration"

In this Section you will find a detailed description of the configuration of figuration".Please be advised that the configuration can also be done via the PC sIn addition we want to point out the "quick configuration" facility in the mcription in Section 16, Quick configuration in the Template menu.The "quick configuration" is very convenient and absolutely sufficient fo

12.1 Selecting the configuration

Fig. 12-1 Configuration menu, example: configuring analog input AI0

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu level 3. menu level 4. m

Indication 2 INSTRUMENT B01 AI01 Q01Operate 2 AI-DEFINITION B02 AI02 Q02Selftune AO-DEFINITION B11 AI11 Q03Parameter BIO-DEFINIT. B12 AI12 P05Configuration LOOP1 B13 AI13 P06Service PROGRAMMER B14 AI14 P09Supervisor Q10

P11Q12Q13

EscMenu Enter Enter Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

81

12.2 Configuration table structureanual) are structured as follows:

, linearization, filtering,

ctuator output, input relations,

commended:

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 12 "Configuration"

The configuration tables depicted in these instructions (see end of the mInstrument all parameters valid for the entire device.AI definition Analog inputs with the functions defining sensors

scalingAO definition Define signal ranges of the analog outputsBIO definitions Define binary inputs/outputs as inputs or outputsLoop 1 Configure control function with the functions for a

PID structureState corr.1 Select and parameterize state correction.Programmer Activate programs

12.3 Sequence of configuration

The following sequence for the configuration of a new instruments is re1. Instrument2. Analog inputs3. State correction, if applicable4. Analog outputs5. Binary inputs/outputs6. Control function

42/61-10010 EN

12.4 Changing the configuration

guration, questions (Qx) or parameters (Px)red for modification.

ble the selected question/parameter for dification:ter>

change flashes.

re answered with a one- or two-digit number. require the input of values with up to 5 digits “Parameterization”).

ange the flashing position:>,<>ve the flashing position:d>ft the decimal point:ss and hold <Ind>ociated with the currently flashing number is the text line.

ept selected answer:ter>

stops flashing.

82 Digitric 100, Chapter 12 "Configuration"

Fig. 12-2 Selection of → B01 → Q01z-19113

Fig. 12-3 Changing the configurationz-19111

During confimay be offe

1. Enamo<En

Enter

The enabled

Questions aParameters(see section

2. Ch<

3. Mo<In

4. ShiPre

The text assdisplayed in

5. Acc<En

Enter

The answer

83

12.5 Exit configuration menu

ps one level up in the menu system.

this key longer than 5 seconds, the menuited.

sibility function is enabled (see section), the instrument checks the configuration fors and plausibility when exiting the menu.

ly, the function settings are processed for

ssful configuration the instrument switchesonfiguration menu.

uration menu:

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 12 "Configuration"

Fig. 12-4 Check answerz-19138

Fig. 12-5 Generate…z-19140

Fig. 12-6 Configurationz-19141

<Menu> jum

If you presssystem is ex

If the plau“Supervisor”completenesconfiguration

Subsequentexecution.

After succeback to the c

1. Exit config

<Esc>

42/61-10010 EN

13 Configuration examplesfiguration tables listed later in this docu-

Editing

E 1 DEUTSCH2 ENGLISH3 FRANCAIS

1 COLOR REDFF 2 COLOR GREEN

nter

Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

confirm

abbort

dit

84 Digitric 100, Chapter 13 "Configuration examples"

This chapter describes examples for some of the most important configurations. The conment contain more details about the possible configuration options.

Fig. 13-1 “Instrument“ configuration menu

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu level 3. menu level 4. menu level

Indication 2 INSTRUMENT B01 LANGUAGE F01 LANGUAGOperate 2 AI-DEFINITION B02 BIN.INPUTSSelftune AO-DEFINITION B03 BIN.FLAGSParameter BIO-DEFINIT. B04 REMOTE OPER.Configuration LOOP1 B05 BIN.OUTPUTSService PROGRAMMER B06 DISPLAY F01 COLORSupervisor B10 ALM.HANDLING F02 COL.CHA.O

B11 USED MODULS F03 NO FLASHB12 SET_MODUL_TYPB20 PASSWORDB30 COMMUNICATION

EscMenu

EscMenu

Enter Enter Enter E

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

e

85

13.1 Device

tion should be paid to item I-B11-Q01 “Hard-on“. Which input/output modules can be con-ends on the available modules that are I-B12-Q01. When the hardware recognitionI-B11-Q01=1), the existing module is auto-cognized and entered in I-B12-Q01. I-B11-automatically reset to zero.

at does not (yet) exist can be entered manu- to be considered for the configuration. How-evice cannot be commissioned with an

hardware. In this case, the error messagetput.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 13 "Configuration examples"

13.1.1 Hardware

Fig. 13-2z-19070

Fig. 13-3z-19071

Special attenware definitifigured depregistered inis enabled (matically reQ01 is then

A module thally in I-B12ever, the dincomplete “Slot 1“ is ou

42/61-10010 EN

13.1.2 Password

ber of up to 5 digits.xisting password is deactivatedassword protection is enabled. pon exit from the menu system the pass-ord protection will become active immedi-tely.pon exit from the menu system the assword protection will only be activatedfter 3 seconds. Within this delay it is ossible to select the parameter or onfiguration level again without re-entering he password.ctive password, changes enabled. arameter(s) being changed.


Fig. 13-4 Setting the passwordz-19117

The password is a numI-B20-Q01 = 0 EI-B20-Q01 = 1 P

Uwa

I-B20-Q01 = 2 Upapct

I-B20-Q02 AP

87

13.2 AI definition

Editing

mA 1 AI01 0. . .20mAR 2 AI01 4. . .20mAONE 3 AI01 TCLO 4 AI01 RTD-2WHI 5 AI01 RTD-3WRT. 7 AI01 POT.150AL 8 AI01 POT.1500AL

N.BON.FL

nter

Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

confirm

abbort

dit


Fig. 13-5 Analog input menu

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu level 3. menu level 4. menu level

Indication 2 INSTRUMENT B01 AI01 Q01 AI01 4. . .20Operate 2 AI-DEFINITION B02 AI02 Q02 AI01-LINEASelftune AO-DEFINITION B11 AI11 Q03 AI01-DIM NParameter BIO-DEFINIT. B12 AI12 P05 AI01-SCAL.Configuration LOOP1 B13 AI13 P06 AI01-SCAL.Service PROGRAMMER B14 AI14 P09 AI01-FILTESupervisor Q10 AI01-FAIL.V

P11 AI01-FAIL.VQ12 AI01-ERR=Q13 AI01-ERR=

EscMenu

EscMenu

Enter Enter Enter E

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

e

42/61-10010 EN

13.2.1 General

ice. The scaling is used to define the mea-further processing steps in the device.

range and number of digits to the right of the

cted according to its type and connection dia- AI-B01-Q01.

he number of the input on the module.

s replaced with a default value, which may beer action.

ller output does not react on the sensor trou-

e independently of the controller reaction.


All analog input must be scaled to permit their further use in the devsuring values, which are then used as floating point values for all

How the digital input, i.e. process value PV, is displayed in terms of thepoint can be set independently.

Example:Thermocouple type KMeasuring range of the sensor: -200...+1400 °CControl range: 300.0...500.0 °CAI01 is the universal input of the basic unit. The sensor is conne

gram. The input type must be entered in the device moduleAI02 is an optional universal input connected to the main board.AI1y are the analog inputs of the module in slot 1; y represents t

13.2.2 Sensor problems

All inputs and sensor types are monitored.

1. Reaction of the controller:

AI-Bxy-Q10 = 1In case of sensor troubles or cable break the missing measured value ioutside the normal measuring range to force the corresponding controll

AI-Bxy-Q10 = 2L1-B07-Q06=1An unchanged measured value is simulated to the controller. The controble.

2. Signal transmission:With AI-Bxy-Q12 > 0 and AI-Bxy-Q13 > 0 signal transmission is possibl

89

13.2.3 Dimension

is scaled separately and can be provided withnsion.

ep, the dimension “° C“ is assigned by defaultature sensor inputs.

ious dimensions for selection. If the neededs not available, a 4-digit dimension can beI-Bxy-Q04 through AI-Bxy-Q03 = 1.

g signals can be attenuated with a first de-filter to suppress all measured value varia-e troubles resulting from them. The time be set with AI-Bxy-Q090 h = 2 min).


13.2.4 Filtering

Fig. 13-6 Defining a user-specific dimensionz-19118

Every input an own dime

In the first stto all temper

AI-Bxy-Q03 provides vardimension icreated in A

Fig. 13-7 Filter time constant 0.00.20 h = 20 sz-19120

All measuringree delay tions and thconstant can(max. 0.02.0

42/61-10010 EN

13.2.5 mA inputs

selected scaling.

resulting measured value is forced to 0

ized temperature transmitter, .an be set.

on.

le. “Service“).


AI-Bxy-Q01 = 1,2 Signal range 0 or 4 to 20 mA.AI-Bxy-Q03 Measured value is indicated linearly and with theAI-Bxy-P05 Display with measured value 0 or 4 mA. AI-Bxy-P06 Display with measured value 20 mA.AI-Bxy-Q02 = 2,3 Measured value is square-rooted. Below PV0 the

or replaced with a linear calculated value.AI-Bxy-P08 Used for setting PV0.AI-Bxy-Q02 = 4...14 If the measured value is provided by a non-linear

the sensor characteristic may be used by defaultWith AI-Bxy-P05 and P06 the transmitter range c

Example:Transmitter300 to 700 °C, type K = 0... 20 mA, mV-proportional:AI-Bxy-Q01 = 1AI-Bxy-Q02 = 6AI-Pxy-Q05 = 300,0AI-Pxy-Q06 = 700,0AI-Bxy-Q03 = 3 (automatic)

13.2.6 Thermocouple input

AI-Bxy-Q01 = 3 Thermocouple.AI-Bxy-Q02 = 4...13 Selection of thermocouple type.AI-Bxy-Q03 = 3 Can be switched to °F; AI-Bxy-Q03 = 4.AI-Bxy-Q07 = 0...4 Depending on the reference junction compensati

13.2.7 Resistance thermometer input

AI-Bxy-Q01 = 4, 5, 6 Depending on the used connection typeAI-B01-Q02 There are 2 ranges for AI01:

= 13 -200.0...+200.0 °C= 15 -200.0...+800.0 °C

AI-B02-Q02 As AI01, if existing, 4-wire circuitry is also possibWith 2-wire circuitry line balancing (adjustment) is required (see Section

91

13.2.8 Teletransmitter input

smitter measurement. Refer to Section “Ser-e as for mA-inputs.

seen below to set them:

actuation of the manual control buttons < >controllers).

re relevant for the control unit.

nt, i.e. it is open when not under power.

nt, i.e. it is closed when not under power.


Usually, the upper and lower range values must be adjusted for teletranvice“ for detailed instructions. The scaling and linearization are the samUniversal input AI01for teletransmitter measurement:AI-B01-Q01 = 7 or 8 Universal input AI02 for teletransmitter measurement:AI-B02-Q01 = 7 or 8

13.3 Characteristic curve

Fig. 13-8z-19079

There are two characteristic curves for controllers. Proceed in the order

Manual characteristic curve (MC) L1-B01-Q03The manual characteristic defines how the controller output reacts uponand <> (this function is defined by the type of wiring when using step

The requirements specified for this result from the safety aspects that a

Example:Valve is spring-opened and is closed in proportion with the output curre

or

Valve is spring-closed and is opened in proportion with the output curre

42/61-10010 EN

Through selection of the proper characteristic curve it is possible to open the valve by actuating the < > button, in-

t signal into two output signals with the same

pon a change of the controlled variable, i.e.value. Is the system cooling to be intensified

matic characteristic curve.

e serial interface

accordingly.

with only an external setpoint.ol.or via the interface. follows the active setpoint.

tion.er with the configuration data. P1 and saved accordingly. This value can be

the operation level resulting from the process


dependent of the type. An open valve is indicated through y = 100 %. The MC block may additionally define splitting of the PID function outpuor different characteristic curves (split-range).

Automatic characteristic curve (AC) L1-B02-Q01The automatic characteristic curve defines how the controller reacts uwhether the output shall increase or decrease with increasing process with increasing temperature, or shall heating be reduced?

Observe the selected manual characteristic curve when setting the auto

13.4 SetpointsUp to 7 setpoint sources are available in the controller:

– up to 4 setpoints (SP1 to SP4) that can be entered manually or via th– 1 external setpoint Sxt, in conjunction with an analog input,– 1 computer setpoint SPC and– 1 programmer with 10 programs P01 to P10.

Which of the setpoints are available is defined by configuring the device

13.4.1 Setpoint 1

L1-B05-Q01 = 0 Setpoint SP1 can be switched off for applicationsSetpoint SP1 cannot be activated with ratio contr

L1-B05-Q01 = 1 Setpoint can be changed via the control buttons L1-B05-Q01 = 2 When another setpoint is active, the setpoint SP1

This permits bumpless transfer to setpoint SP1.L1-B05-Q02 = 0 The current setpoint is not saved in the configura

It cannot be transmitted to another device togethL1-B05-Q02 = 1 On the parameter level L1-P81 is set as setpoint S

transmitted to other devices. Setpoint changes onare not saved in the configuration.

93

13.4.2 Setpoint SP2 to SP4 = Ratio setpoint SR1 to SR3

oint 1 (difference can only be set on the pa-

tio setpoints SR1 to SR3. Setpoint SP 1 does

e factory setting 99999 EU/s.

p) or L1-P79 (decreasing ramp).

d


It can be configured for every setpoint if: – it can be changed via the front panel– it can be changed and saved as parameter L1-P82 to L1-P84 or– it is active as absolute value or differential value as compared to setp

rameter level). – For ratio control the setpoints SP2 to SP4 always correspond to the ra

not exist.

13.4.3 Computer setpoint

The computer setpoint can only be modified via the interface.

13.4.4 Setpoint ramp

The setpoint ramp is always active, but is practically disabled through th

The setpoint ramp function can be enabled with L1-P77 (increasing ram

Setpoint display during transfer from old setpoint to target setpoint:

L1-B05-Q09 = 1 Target setpoint displayedL1-B05-Q09 = 2 Current setpoint, defined by the ramp is displaye

42/61-10010 EN

13.5 Programmervailable.

B01-Q01 to Q10):

01.ot with the initial setpoint.

ositive or negative gradient until reaching the cordingly. If P1 = P2 (i.e. gradient is 0),

PV0 to P2.

T2 T3

P3

t


One programmer saving up to 10 programs with 15 segments each is a

13.5.1 Configuring programs

The individual programs can be activated in the configuration menu (P-0 Program is not active and cannot be selected via the front panel.1 The program starts with the initial setpoint programmed with P-P2 The program starts with the actual value at that time (PV0) and n

The gradient is calculated.

The program setpoint then runs up/down as a ramp value with a psetpoint P2. The duration of segment 1 is prolonged/shortened acthe program setpoint changes within the configured time T1 from

Fig. 13-9 Program start

|P2-P1|T1

-----------------

t=0 program start

T1

PV(t)

PV0

P1

P2

SP,PV

effective segment time T1

ßßPV0<P2

PV0>P2

95

Additionally, it can be configured how programs shall behave when the power returns (P-B02-Q01):

the same point where it has stopped when the

is not valid when the program is in the first

f the setpoint in dependence of the time. Pa-ached after a time period Px-P17. For a step

the previous segment has been run through.

ts of the setpoint program. These four binary be entered in the respective parameter:

r under L1 - B11 - Q10 to Q13.

een the segments number Px-P47 and nerator will run through this loop until the totalmaining segments will be processed.

rogram is stopped in the individual segments

d value is within the tolerance band (setpoint


0 Program is reset upon power return1 Program restarts in the previous operating mode, i.e. continues at

power outage occurred:Exception:If the program is configured to start up with the actual value, this segment when the power outage occurs.

13.5.2 Parameterizing programs

Parameters P-P01 to P-P31The program generator parameters Px01 to Px31 define the behavior orameter Px-P01 is the initial value. The value of parameter Px-P02 is reresponse the time has to be set to “0“.

CautionA segment with an end value of -9999 will terminate the program when

Parameters P-P32 to P-P46There are four binary tracks that are time-synchronous with the segmentracks can be set in each segment. The sum of the wanted outputs is toBinary track 1 set in segment x: P0x = 1Binary track 2 set in segment x: P0x = 2Binary track 3 set in segment x: P0x = 4Binary track 4 set in segment x: P0x = 8Example:Binary tracks 1, 3 and 4 are to be set in segment 2:Px-P33 = 13 = 1 + 4 + 8.The 4 binary tracks can be applied to the binary outputs of the controlle

Parameters P-P47 to P-P49The parameters Px-P47 to Px-P49 can be used to configure a loop betwPx-P48. After reaching the end of the segment Px-P48, the program genumber of runs reaches the amount set under Px-P49. After this, the re

Parameters P-P50 to P-P64The parameters P-P50 to P-P64 are used to define whether or not the pwhen the measured value cannot follow the given setpoint. This will stop the ramps, and hold times will only run when the measure± tolerance). The factory setting 99999 disables this function.

!

42/61-10010 EN

13.5.3 Programming table for a program

nce (+/-) 4 binary tracks

1 Px-P332 Px-P343 Px-P354 Px-P365 Px-P376 Px-P387 Px-P398 Px-P409 Px-P410 Px-P421 Px-P432 Px-P443 Px-P454 Px-P46

0 Px-P32


x = program; x = 01 to 10

Table 13-1 Programming table

segment setpoint segment time toleraPx-P1 = start valuePx-P2 = end value

2 Px-P3 = end value Px-P18 Px-P53 Px-P4 = end value Px-P19 Px-P54 Px-P5 = end value Px-P20 Px-P55 Px-P6 = end value Px-P21 Px-P56 Px-P7 = end value Px-P22 Px-P57 Px-P8 = end value Px-P23 Px-P58 Px-P9 = end value Px-P24 Px-P59 Px-P10 = end value Px-P25 Px-P510 Px-P11 = end value Px-P26 Px-P511 Px-P12 = end value Px-P27 Px-P612 Px-P13 = end value Px-P28 Px-P613 Px-P14 = end value Px-P29 Px-P614 Px-P15 = end value Px-P30 Px-P615 Px-P16 = end value Px-P31 Px-P6

1 Px-P17 Px-P5

97

7 = end segment P48 of repeat loop

. . . . 15

t

2 P23 . . . . P315 P56 . . . . P647 P38 . . . . P46

= P49

P7

P8

P15

P16


Fig. 13-10 Programmer with loop, segments 3 to 7

setpoint

segment number 1 23 = start

segment P47 of repeat loop

4 5 6

segment time P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P2segment tolerance P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 P54 binary tracks P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P3

In total n-times operated ; n

P4 P5

P3P2P6

start atprocess value PV0

start atsetpoint P1

42/61-10010 EN

13.6 Fixed-value control

inside or outside the controller. When used d additionally (see “State correction“).

dicator.dicator

alue for Gain. For a P-controller with Gain = 1


Fig. 13-11 Fixed-value control

13.6.1 Task

The process value PV is controlled until reaching setpoint SP generatedfor steam or gas flow control, a state correction function may be enable

13.6.2 Configuration

Input linkagesL1-B03-Q01 = 1; Input circuit for fixed-value control.L1-B03-Q02 Not used.L1-B03-Q03 Usually 2; Err in EU.L1-B03-Q04 Dimensions for PV/SP display.L1-B03-P05 User-defined dimension.L1-B03-Q06 Decimal point position in the digital indicator.L1-B03-P07 Value (number) for lower range value of digital inL1-B03-P08 Value (number) for upper range value of digital inL1-B03-P16 Desired lower range value for analog indicatorL1-B03-P17 Desired upper range value for analog indicatorThe difference between L1-B03-P08 and L1-B03-P07 is the reference van output change of 100% results from a input change of P08 - P07.

99

13.6.3 Example 1

s will be achieved between -200 °C and

e number of digits of the display, the number

it makes sense from the point of view of the

the signal is applied to an analog output

ntrol.


Thermocouple type K, measuring range -200...+1400 °C: Correct value+1400 °C.

Control range900.0 to 1100.0 °C with one digit to the right of the decimal point:L1-B03-Q04 = 3 Indication in °CL1-B03-Q06 = 1 Decimal point position 0000.0

Note When the number of digits or decimals of the measured value exceeds thof decimals is automatically reduced. L1-B03-P07 = 900 Lower range valueL1-B03-P08 = 1100 Upper range valueNo need to change the position of the decimal point.

Analog indicatorL1-B03-P16 = 900 Lower range valueL1-B03-P17 = 1100 Upper range valueAny other setting between -200 and +1400 is possible and permitted if plant. No need to change the position of the decimal point.AnnotationSince Digitric 100 has no analog indicator, this setting is only relevant if(0/4...20 mA).

Setpoint limitsThe setpoint limits should be set to useful values within the range of coL1-B03-P75 SPmin = 900 (°C)L1-B03-P76 SPmax = 1050 (°C)

42/61-10010 EN

13.6.4 Example 2

propriate units (mbar, bar, °C). The resulting

ssible.

ntrol.

:

ut AI02 can execute various tasks:


Fixed-value control with state correction.The inputs needed to calculate the flow rate must be configured in the apsignal can, for example, be calculated in m3/h.

Measuring range0...20000 m3/h After state correction

Control rangeSame as measuring rangeL1-B03-Q04 = 7 Indication in m3/hL1-B03-Q06 = 0 No decimal point positionNoteWith a display up to 20000 no digit to the right of the decimal point is poL1-B03-P07 = 0 Lower range valueL1-B03-P08 = 20000 Upper range value

Analog indicatorL1-B03-P16 = 0 Lower range valueL1-B03-P17 = 20000 Upper range value

Setpoint limitsThe setpoint limits should be set to useful values within the range of coL1-B03-P75 SPmin = 5000 (m3/h)L1-B03-P76 SPmax = 18000 (m3/h)

Analog input routingUsually, the following is valid for single-loop controllers without modulesL1-B04-Q01 = 1: Input AI01 = process value PV.However, another configuration is also possible. The second analog inp1. Position feedback for step controllers

L1-B01-Q04 = 22. External setpoint

L1-B05-Q06 = 2

101

3. 2nd switchable measured value source

e different measuring ranges.

and pyrometer measurement between 1000

rollers)


L1-B04-Q02 = 2 together withL1-B04-Q06 = 1 to 16, depending on the available binary input

Note The two measured values must have the same dimension, but may havExamples:– Level control of two different tanks.– Temperature control with thermocouple measurement up to 1200 °C

and 2500 °C.

4. Parameter controlGain: L1-B02-Q07 = 13 or/andTr: L1-B02-Q10 = 13 or/andTd: L1-B02-Q13 = 13 or/andMR: L1-B02-Q16 = 13 or/and

5. Disturbance variable feedforwardL1-B02-Q25 = 2 together withL1-B02-Q26 = 1 to 4

6. Output tracking(Output is temporarily forced to value of input 2, not for step contL1-B10-Q10 = 2 together with L1-B09-Q11 = 1 to 16 (BIxy)

42/61-10010 EN

13.7 Multi-component controlV from several measured variables.

steam flow measurement (see the respective

are to be summed up in a single-loop control-cient to use the basic device.

ulti-component measurementErr = IC1 × CONST1 + CONST2 (IC2 + CONST3 ×IC3) - SP

r 5

with only two inputsdepending on the input configuration

Start value of the analog indicator End value of the analog indicator


The multi-component input circuit is used to calculate the actual value P

13.7.1 Application

Summation circuits for measuring signals or setpoints.Example: Control of the cumulative values of two flow rate signals. Additionally, state correction is possible and can be integrated for gas orsection of this manual).

13.7.2 Configuration

Fig. 13-12 Flow rate summation

If only two values ler, it may be suffi

Input circuit for mL1-B03-Q01 = 2

L1-B03-Q02 = 2 oL1-P101 = 1L1-P102 = 1L1-P103 = 0 L1-B03-Q03

to P08L1-B03-P16 L1-B03-P17

Flow A

Flow B

F

FFC

F

Z-19068

103

L1-B04-Q0x

to L1-P103


Fig. 13-13 Multi-component input circuitz-19095.L1_ICx Inputs of the multi-component input circuit routed via

with the analog inputs AIxy.L1_CONSTx Evaluation factors CONST1 to CONST3 = L1-P101 .L1_SP_ACT Current setpoint.L1_PV_DIGI Digital indicator for PV .L1_SP_DIGI Digital indicator for SP.L1_PV_GRAPH Analog indicator for PV.L1_SP_GRAPH Analog indicator for SP.L1_D To derivative action.L1_DEV Control deviation

42/61-10010 EN

13.8 Ratio control measured variable.

ratio setpoint (input current), the programmer,

. In this case, the setpoint SP1 is added.

cked as long as it is not used, to ensure bump-

ntrol. in case of fixed value control or when anotherpossible.

nt ratio.


The ratio input circuit is used to proportion the controlled variable to the

13.8.1 Ratios and setpoints

Several ratio sources SR1 to SR3 (setpoint = SP2 to SP4), one external and a computer ratio setpoint are available as ratio setpoints.

All ratio input circuits can also be used as fixed value/ratio input circuits

The circuitry can be configured in such a way that the setpoint SP1 is traless transfer from ratio to fixed value control.

Configuration:L1-B05-Q01 = 3 The setpoint SP1 is tracked during ratio coThe ratio setpoint SR1 can be configured to track another ratio setpoint setpoint is used. Thus, a bumpless transfer to the ratio setpoint SR1 is

Configuration:L1-B05-Q03 = 6 The setpoint 2 = SR1 is tracked to the curre

105

ut signal conditioning for A and B and without

Error

m3/h122X 1.

5Vx 0

W

%0- 2.Xw

m3/h122 3.

+-

z-19125

01.


Fig. 13-14 Schematic diagram of the input linkages for “ratio A/B“ withoscaling or limiting parameters.

PV = Flow A

Flow B

SR1

SR2

SR3

SRC

Pxx

Rxt

SP1

011.

117

500

51.

001.

001.

002.

00.22 m3/h

DIV

MUL+

Bias (Parameter 117)

SPw

SPw

1.

1

Vextern

42/61-10010 EN

13.8.2 Ratio control: Mixed control

n 0 and an infinite value.

rs:)

as flow 1, e.g. in m 3/h

mportant for external indication of 0/4...20mA

o different ways to set the appropriate set- mixed control applications used in the fieldngineering:

of the two components:RPV = Flow A / Flow B

utralization controlcomponent related to the final product:

RPV = Flow A / (Flow A + Flow B)t content of milk products uting is as follows: Flow A always has to beC1, Flow B with IC2.

necessary input routing in dependence of thees and their arrangement the following con-required.


Configuration of ratio 1: (A/B)Mixture control RPV = Flow A / Flow BRPV is the actual value and can theoretically assume any value betweeL1-B03-Q01 = 4 or 5 Ratio or fixed value/ratioThe following user-specific settings can be made for the analog indicatoL1-B03-Q15 = 2 Ratio process value (RPV) and setpoint (SRL1-B03-Q03 = 0 Control deviation in % orL1-B03-Q15 = 1 Flow A and flow B× SR (ratio setpoint)L1-B03-Q03 = 1 Control deviation, indicated in the same EUAnnotation:Digitric 100 itself has no analog indicator. However, this settings will be isignals that are output to an analog output.

Fig. 13-15 Mixture controlz-19068

There are twpoint ratio inof process e

Mixture ratioRatio 1 Example: nePortion of a Ratio 2 Example: faThe input rolinked with I

Besides the input modulfiguration is

Flow A

Flow B

F

FFC

F

Z-19068

107

Configuration of flow A:3

et ratio) or PV (flow A) and

R display

input signals value.nd SR (set ratio) or PV (flow A) and

ge

3-Q15 to P17 via analog output

+ flow B)een 0 and 1. Therefore, the scaling is set to

tions:

20 mA)]d input signals with equal measuring

R (Set ratio) or


L1-B03-Q04 Dimension e.g. m /hL1-B03-Q06 Decimal point, depending on the applicationL1-B03-P07 Lower range value (usually 0) L1-B03-P08 Upper range valueConfiguration of the ratio:L1-B03-Q09 Digital indicator RPV (ratio value) and SR (s

SR (set ratio) × flow BL1-B03-Q10 Dimension for R, e.g. without or % L1-B03-Q12 Digits to the right of the decimal point for theL1-B03-P14 Flow A (20 mA) / flow B (20 mA)

Numerical value of the quotient of the scaledwith equal measuring values in mA, e.g. end

L1-B03-Q15 Analog indicator RPV (ratio process value) aSR × flow B

L1-B03-P16 Analog indicator, start of wanted display ranL1-B03-P17 End of wanted display range L1-B03-Q18 Output of the display defined through L1-B0

Configuration of ratio 2: (A/(A+B))Mixture control for portion of the final product RPV = flow A/ (flow ARPV as an actual value or SR (setpoint) can only assume a value betw0...100% or even smaller. The configuration is the same as for ratio 1, but with the following excepL1-B03-Q10 = 2 usually %L1-B03-P14 = [flow A (20 mA)] / [flow A (20mA) + flow B (

Numerical value of the quotient of the scalevalues in mA, e.g. end value.

L1-B03-Q15 Analog indicator RPV (ratio process) and SPV (flow A) and (SR × flow B)/(1-SR)

42/61-10010 EN

nputs via L1-B04 100Digital indicator for PVDigital indicator for RactualAnalog indicator for SP


Fig. 13-16 Input circuit for fixed value /ratio control 2 (Z-19126).L1_ICx Inputs of ratio input circuit are routed to the analog i.L1_R R-sepoint CONST_R100.L_SP_ACT Current fixed value setpoint .L1_PVDIGI .L_-SPDIGI Digital indicator for SP .L1_RACTDIGI .L1_PV_GRAPH Analog indicator for PV .L1_SP_GRAPH.L1_RV_FV Switching between fixed value and ratio

109

13.9 Multiplication

input the required subtraction.

cation input circuit permits product controlut variables. Instead of an input variable theal may consist of two variables.

IC2 +CONST3 × IC3)-SP

e application is a heat control system. The in-utgoing flow of a heat carrier (e.g. water) isn a heat consumer, as well as the tempera-ce between the flow and the return flow.high-precision measurement, the pressureture are determined and then used to correct accordingly (for water usually only the tem-orrected). The corresponding flow or return

ature - depending on where the flowmeter ise circuit (flow or return flow) - is used for cor-


ConfigurationThe three inputs are to be scaled with their dimensions. Input linkages:L1-B03-Q01 = 3 MultiplicationRouting of state correction:SC1-B02-Q01 = Flow signal depending on the used input SC1-B02-Q02 = 0 No pressure correctionSC1-B02-Q03 = Flow temperature, depending on the used inputSC1-B02-Q04 = 0 No density correctionRouting of input linkages:L1-B04-Q01 = 91 Corrected flow signal from state correction 1L1-B04-Q02 = Flow temperature, depending on the used inputL1-B04-Q03 = Return flow temperature, depending on the usedParameter: Setting L1-P103 = -1 will change the addition into

Fig. 13-17 Heat control

The multipliwith two inpweighted tot

Err = IC1 × (

One possiblcoming or omeasured oture differenTo ensure and temperathe flow rateperature is cflow temperlocated in threction.

TC

TT

TT

Z-19127

42/61-10010 EN

Digital indicator for PV Digital indicator for SPPH Analog indicator for PVPH Analog indicator for SP

To derivative actionControl deviation


Fig. 13-18 Multiplication input circuitZ-19096.L1_ICx Inputs of the input circuit

Ratio routed to analog inputs via L1-B04 .L1_CONST3 Weighting factor for IC3.L1_SP_ACT Current setpoint

.L1_PVDIGI

.L1_SPDIGI

.L1_PV-GRA

.L1_SP-GRA

.L1_D

.L1_DEV

111

13.10 Parameter changeover/control (Gain scheduling)

ontrol and changeover permit to adapt theto reproducible changes of the process.

arameter changeover

ral parameters can be changed over in de-f a limit value or binary input. This is, for ex-essary when changing over between twoasuring signals (process variable).

over is not required when switching between with different measuring ranges for the sameiable. The input scaling will not affect the

alue when the changeover is made.

n and parameterization: = 11 or 12 ver through AL4 or BIxin-Lowin-High

: P-PI changeover:-Low is set to 0. As long as Tr-Low is active, no integral action.


Fig. 13-19 Gain changeover

Parameter cparameters

13.10.1 P

One or sevependence oample, necdifferent me

The changetransmittersphysical varmeasured v

ConfiguratioL1-B02-Q07

ChangeoL1-P07 = GaL1-P08 = Ga

Special caseExample: Trthere will be

Z-19086

Gain

GainHigh

AL4 or BIx

GainLow

42/61-10010 EN

13.10.2 Parameter control

ter is changed linearly between a start valuein dependence of a freely selectable analog

easured value, output variable, etc.).

arameterization:5 or 13 ugh selected variable-B02-Q07 = 2)

howigh


Fig. 13-20 Linear parameter control, U is the controlling variable

LinearThe active parameand an end value variable (setpoint, m

Configuration and pL1-B02-Q07 = 1 to

Gain control throe.g. setpoint (L1

L1-P06 = Gain-LowL1-P07 = Gain-HigL1-P08 = U-Gain LL1-P09 = U-Gain H

Gain

GainHigh

U-Gain HighU-Gain Low

GainLow

U-GainZ-19085

GainG-Hi( ) UG-Hi UG-Lo–( ) G-Lo( ) UG-Hi UG-Lo–( )+

UG-Hi UG-Lo–---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

113

ue control the gain considerably varies with. The greatest gain is reached with pH 7, the

values are reached with pH0 and pH14.eciprocal gain is provided in the controllers.

n: = 7 Parameter control

through process variable PVvia table 1

rameterized with the control loop gain (de-e volumetric analysis curve).


Fig. 13-21 Non-linear parameter control through measured value pH

Non-linearWith pH-valthe pH valuelowest gainTherefore, r

ConfiguratioL1-B02-Q07

Table 1 is parived from th

Z--19099

pH

Gain

pH

Process

Gain

Controller

42/61-10010 EN

13.11 State correctionsigned for special pressure and temperaturemeasuring errors may occur. Therefore, cor-le for correcting both ideal and real gases.

tandardized flow (at 0 °C and 1.013 bar).

tate correction is only possible when the func- (flow control with state correction)).

put module slots. Note that the inputs mustectly or via a transmitter.

ype)


The measuring instruments for gas or steam flow measurement are devalues. If the actual values differ from the design values, considerable rection circuits are provided for correcting these errors. They are suitab

The state correction calculates from the current measuring values the sThe state correction can be used together with all input linkages.

Usually, additional analog inputs are required for state correction, and stion has been integrated in the configuration (e.g. with L1-B04-Q01 = 91

13.11.1 Input and output routing

The state correction inputs can be routed in dependence of the analog inbe scaled. It is negligible whether a temperature value is connected dir

13.11.2 Terms and abbreviations

Index “r“ stands for “calculated values“ (values for orifice design)

Qv Operating volume flow in m3/hQn Volume flow in the normal state in m3/hQm Mass flow in the normal state in t/hP in bar absolute or overpressure (depending on transmitter tPr Absolute pressure T Temperature in °CPn Standard pressure 1.0135 barTn Standard temperature 273.15 K = 0 °CRHO Density in kg/m3 RHO-MIN Correction range for RHORHO-MAX Correction range for RHOPatm Atmospheric pressure in bar abs(olute)Pr in bar abs(olute)Zn Real gas factor with Pn and Tn (compressibility)

115

Pmin/Pmax Correction range for P same as for transmitter

er and configuration data.

Tmax

P26

P27

P28

put

Z-19144


Tmin/Tmax Correction für TP20...28 Real gas factors (factory setting 1.00) (compressibility)

Table 13-2

HAB Spacing of connection piece in mm gives water level in mmTvgl Temperature of reference column in °C.

13.11.3 Configuration for gas and steamf

Fig. 13-22 State correction for gas and steamSee Table 13-3 to Table 13-5 for details about the paramet

Tmin Tmean

Pabsmin P20 P23

Pabsmean P21 P24

Pabsmax P22 P25

SC1Out

∆P, Volume

Pressure

Temperature

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4Density

42/61-10010 EN

13.11.4 Configuration for water mass flow

er and configuration data.

eter and configuration data.

Z-19145

SC1Output

SC1Output

Z-19146


Fig. 13-23 State correction for gas, steam and drum water level See Table 13-6 to Table 13-8 for details about the paramet

13.11.5 Configuration for drum water level

Fig. 13-24 Water levelSee Table 13-7 and Table 13-8 for details about the param

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

∆P, Volume

Pressure

Temperature

Pressure

∆P

Tvgl (= Tcompare)l

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

117

13.11.6 Gas and steam

ed steam,low,tial pressure

re correction

Saturated steam,mass flow,differential pressuretemp. correction

Unit

square-rooted

linear square-rooted

4 5 5 –

1 0 1 –

Nm3/h

Value Value Value kg/h

Value mbar

Value bar abs

Value bar abs

Value Value °C

–

kg/m3


Table 13-3 Design values of the measuring equipment (calculated values)linear No square-rooting of the transmitter or analog input square rooted Square rooting of the transmitter or analog input grayed No entry required, all entries will be ignored

Question/parame-ter

Gas,differential pressure measurement

Gas,volume measure-ment

Steam,mass flow,differential pressure

Saturatmass fdifferenpressu

SC1-B01 linear square-rooted


linear

Q01 1 1 2 3 3 4

Square rooting Q29 0 1 0 1 0

Standard flow Qn,r or P02 Value Value Value

Mass flow Qm, r P02 Value Value Value Value Value Value

Differential pressure ∆P,r P03 Value Value Value

Atmospheric pressure Patm,r,abs

P04 Value Value Value Value Value Value

Pressure P,r,abs P05 Value Value Value Value Value Value

Temperature T,r P06 Value Value Value Value Value

Real gas factor Z(Pr,Tr),r P07 Value Value Value

Standard density ρn, r P08 Value Value Value

42/61-10010 EN

rmined and provided for commissioning.

Tmax

Value (P26)

Value (P27)

Value (P28)


Fig. 13-25 Basic characteristic curve for Z = f(P,T)

Table 13-4 Real gas factors (factory setting 1.00 for ideal gases).For orifice calculation the real gas factors have to be dete

Tmin Tmean

Pabs,min Value (P20) Value (P23)

Pabs,mean Value (P21) Value (P24)

Pabs,max Value (P22) Value (P25)

119

ter:

the calculated values. If the pressure mea-ure or overpressure limits.

ed steam,low,tial pressure,

re correction

Saturated steam,mass flow,differential pressure,temp. correction

Unit

square-rooted


4 5 5 –

1 1 1 –

2 2 2 –

Value bar

Value bar

Value Value °C

Value Value °C

kg/m3

kg/m3


Table 13-5 Measuring values and correction ranges

The limits for pressure correction must be entered in accordance with the pressure transmit

– Overpressure transmitters require pressure limits in overpressure. – Absolute pressure transmitters require pressure limits in absolute pressure.

If one or several measuring signals are missing, the correction limits must be identical with surement signal is missing, it must be specified in Q18 whether the limits are absolute press

Question/parame-ter

Gas,differential pressure measurement

Gas,volume measure-ment

Steam,mass flow,differential pressure

Saturatmass fdifferenpressu



linear

Q01 1 1 2 3 3 4

Pressure transmitter

Overpressure Q18 1 1 1 1 1 1

Absolute pressure Q18 2 2 2 2 2 2

Correction limits:

Min. pressure P10 Value Value Value Value Value Value

Max. pressure P11 Value Value Value Value Value Value

Min. temperature P12 Value Value Value Value Value

Max. temperature P13 Value Value Value Value Value

Min. density P14 Value Value Value

Max. density P15 Value Value Value

42/61-10010 EN

13.11.7 Water mass flow

Water,volume measurement

Unit

7 –

–

Value kg/h

mbar

Value bar abs

Value bar abs

Value °C

Value kg/m3

Value kg/m3

1 –

2 –

Value bar

Value bar

Value °C

Value °C

Value kg/m3

Value kg/m3


Table 13-6 Design values of the measuring equipment (calculated values)

Question/parameter

Water,differential pressure measurement


Q01 6 6

Square rooting Q29 0 1

Mass flow Qm, r P02 Value Value

Differential pressure ∆P,r P03 Value

Atmospheric pressure Patm,r,abs

P04 Value Value

Pressure P,r,abs P05 Value Value

Temperature T,r P06 Value Value

Real gas factor Z(Pr,Tr),r P07 Value Value

Standard density ρn, r P08 Value Value

Pressure transmitter

Overpressure Q18 1 1

Absolute pressure Q18 2 2

Correction limits:

Min. pressure P10 Value Value

Max. pressure P11 Value Value

Min. temperature P12 Value Value

Max. temperature P13 Value Value

Min. density P14 Value Value

Max.density P15 Value Value

121

Note The limits for pressure correction must be entered in accordance with the pressure transmitter:re.te pressure.

mits must be identical with the calculatedspecified in Q18 whether the limits are ab-

lues)

e reference column temperature.

asurement Unit

mm

°C

°C

°C

vel measurement Unit

lue mbar

lue bar

lue bar

lue mm

lue mm


– Overpressure transmitters require pressure limits in overpressu– Absolute pressure transmitters require pressure limits in absolu

If one or several measuring signals are missing, the correction livalues. If the pressure measurement signal is missing, it must be solute pressure or overpressure limits.

13.11.8 Drum water level

Table 13-7 Design values of the measuring equipment (calculated va

With missing temperature measurement Tmin = Tmax must be set to th

Table 13-8 Measuring values and correction ranges

Question Level me

Q01 = 8

Spacing of connection piece HAB P16 = Value

Tverg P17 = Value

Tmin P12 = Value

Tmax P13 = Value

Question Le

Differential pressure, end value ∆P Q01 = Va

Min. pressure correction, limit Pmin Q10 = Va

Max. pressure correction, limit Pmax Q11 = Va

Output range, start value Q30 = Va

Output range, end value Q31 = Va

42/61-10010 EN

13.11.9 Configuring an analog output for outputting state correction results

vides the calculated results to the input circuit

sults is required, this can be defined by using

/4 mA or 0/2 V 20 mA or 10 V

ulating results.

have no effect on the device itself. However,

g the correction results.


With the configuration seen in Fig. 13-26 the state correction directly proas measuring values.

If an additional analog current/voltage output with the state correction rethe following parameters:

SC1-B01-P30 Lower range value = measuring value for 0% = 0SC1-B01-P31 Upper range value= measuring value for 100% =

The values for P30 and P31 may be within or outside the expected calc

SC1-B01-Q32 and SC1-B01-P33 can be set, but are not mandatory andthey will simplify possible later verifications of the configuration.

With SC1-B03-Q01 an unused analog output is configured for outputtin

123

(Z-19072)

I01 via state correction

Digital indicator for PVAPH Analog indicator for PV

to derivative action


Fig. 13-26 Input circuit for fixed value with additional state correction Input routing of the state correction SC1-B02-Qx.L1_B1 Changeover IC1 <–> IC2 with switch B.L1_ICx Inputs of fixed value input circuit routed.L1_SP_ACT Current setpoint .L1_PVDIGI.L1_SPDIGI Digital indicator for SP .L1_PV_GR.L1_SP_GRAPH Analog indicator for SP .L1_D.L1_DEV Control deviation

42/61-10010 EN

13.12 Control outputs

act)

Of course using other BOxy is also possible.


The following control outputs can be configured:

Two-point controller– with transistor output or– with relay output(high-low-off control e.g. ∆ − Y – Off = On/Off controller with series cont

Three-point controller (heating- off-cooling)– with transistor output or– with relay outputoptionally 1 output also continuous (parameters L1-P25 to P27 active)

Step controller and positioner– with transistor output or– with relay output

Continuous controlleroptionally with split-range (parameters L1-P25 to P27 are active)

In the following examples the binary outputs BO01 and BO02 are used.

125

13.12.1 Two-point controller

on = BO01

on = BO01on = BO02

phase

to “high“alid.

ured accordingly.


Single-loop controller with transistor output in the basic deviceBinary definition:BIO-B01-Q01 = 3 BIO01 is an output with NO contact operatiL1-B01-Q02 = 3 Two-point controllerL1-B10-Q04 = 1 Control output OUT1 to BO01

Two-point controller for high-low-offBinary definition:BIO-B01-Q01 = 3 BIO01 is an output with NO contact operatiBIO-B02-Q01= 2 BIO02 is an output with NC contact operatiL1-B01-Q02 = 3 On/Off controller with series contactL1-B08-Q03 = 4 Alarm value 3 as Errmax series contact L1-P93 = -3 bis -5 % Exact value to be set in the commissioningL1-B10-Q04 = 1 Control output to BO01L1-B11-Q03 = 2 Alarm value 3 on BO02 switches from “low“

Note If the controller is set to manual mode, the changeover to "high" is still v

Single-loop controller with relay outputFor controllers with relay output the available outputs have to be config

42/61-10010 EN

13.12.2 Three-point controller

on = BO01on = BO02

trol output for heating

on = BO01

BO01

ured accordingly.


(Heating - off - cooling)

Single-loop controller with transistor output in the basic unitBIO-B01-Q01 = 3 BIO01 is an output with NO contact operatiBIO-B02-Q01 = 3 BIO02 is an output with NO contact operatiL1-B01-Q02 = 5 Three-point controllerL1-B10-Q04 = 1 1st control output (heating) OUT1 to BO01L1-B10-Q05 = 2 2nd control output (cooling) OUT2 to BO02

Three-point controller (heating - off - cooling) with continuous conBinary definition

BIO-B01-Q01 = 3 BIO01 is an output with NO contact operatiL1-B01-Q01 = 6L1-B10-Q05 = 1 Switching control output (cooling) OUT2 to L1-B10-Q01 = 1 Continuous output (heating) OUT1 to AO01

Single-loop controller with relay outputFor controllers with relay output the available outputs have to be config

127

13.12.3 Motorized valve control (Step controller)

t can be used for position feedback or another

operation = BO01operation = BO02

sually externally given - position. A positioner

of the transistor outputs BO01 and BO02.


When using the basic unit with optional AI02, the second measuring inpufunction.

L1-B01-Q04 = 2 Position feedback to AI02

AI-B02-Q01 = 7 AI02 = 0...150 ΩSee “Service“ section for information about adjusting 0 and 100 %.

Outputs:BIO-B01-Q01 = 3 Binary BIO01 is an output with NO contact BIO-B02-Q01 = 3 Binary BIO02 is an output with NO contact L1-B10-Q04 = 1 Control output “more“ OUT1 to BO01L1-B10-Q05 = 2 Control output “less“ OUT2 to BO02

13.12.4 Positioner

A positioner is a step controller that moves an electrical actuator to a - uneeds a position feedback signal as measured value.

L1-B01-Q01 = 11 PositionerL1-B03-Q01 = 1 Fixed value input circuitL1-B04-Q01 = 1 Position feedback to AI01L1-B05-Q06 = 2 External setpoint to AI02Control output same as for step controller

13.12.5 Controller with relay output

It is also possible to use the relay outputs (BO03, BO04, BO05) instead

42/61-10010 EN

13.12.6 Continuous controller

odule in slot1


Continuous controllers have a 0/4...20 mA control output.

One control output (factory setting):L1-B01-Q02 = 1AO-B01-Q01 = 1 or 2 depending on signal rangeL1-B10-Q01 = 1 1st control output OUT1 to AO01

Two control outputs (split range)Output module in slot 1 (only one exists in the basic unit).L1-B01-Q01 = 7L1-B10-Q02 = 11 2nd control output to 1st output of output mAO-B31-Q01 = 1 or 2 depending on the signal range

129

14 Service

l 3. menu level

ABBDigitric 100CPU:xF:x.xxxxxx.xF-Dat:dd.mm.yy

ces Konfi-Nr.:xxxxxR-Dat:dd.mm.yyfrei

EscMenu

Enter

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 14 "Service"

Fig. 14-1 Service menu

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu leve

Indication 2 InformationOperate 2 Info Hardw.Selftune Display UnitParameter AdjustmentConfiguration CalibrationService Comm.-ServiSupervisor

EscMenu Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

42/61-10010 EN

14.1 Information (general)er during the production or later during repair.

y

100..

...r..: ...at: ...

indicates the hardware configuration of thethe module type plugged in and whether ornal universal input AI01 exists.

is not automatically available in the configu-

gistered with I-B11-Q01 = 1.

130 Digitric 100, Chapter 14 "Service"

This menu shows the information saved in the device by the manufacturThe information cannot be edited by the customer.Item Description Displa1 Manufacturer ABB2 Device type Digitric3 Board index CPU: .4 Manufacturing number F: ...5 Manufacturing date F-Dat: 6 Configuration number Konfi-N7 Repair date Rep.-D8 Free text ...

14.2 Hardware information

Fig. 14-2 (z-20264)

Fig. 14-3 (z-20265)

This windowdevice, i.e. not the optio

The moduleration.

It must be re

131

14.3 Display unit

the LCDect the desired contrast:teps, step 1 = smallest contrast):> <> ept selected changes:ter>


14.3.1 Contrast of the LCD

Fig. 14-4(Z-19131)

Contrast of1. Sel

(9 s<

2. Acc<En

42/61-10010 EN

14.4 AdjustmentPt 100 resistance thermometer and teletrans-

g

th open input!

lected separately for the individual inputs of the modules.

Ixy Pt100-2W can be selected only if Pt 100ent has been configured for the respective

cable between the sensor and the controller sor side. icates the set default value in the bottom line.

adjustment on the controller:

first line is added.

justment:


This menu is used to adjust the controller for measurement with 2-wire mitters.

See the menu tables in Section 17 for instructions.

14.4.1 Example: Adjusting the Pt100, 2-wire, for AI01

Fig. 14-5 Adjustment for AI01 selectedZ-19132

Fig. 14-6 Do you want to start adjustment?Z-19133

Warnin

Do not adjust wi

Adjustment is sethe basic unit and

Submenu item A2-wire-measureminput before.

Procedure

0. Shorten theon the sen

The controller ind

1. Call 1st <Enter>“?“ in the

Enter

2. Start ad<Enter>

!

133

1

the respective input has been configured forame in both cases. The adjustment is alwaysedback) cannot be used fully as a valid mea-

t100 module for 3-wire/4-wire circuitry or via

Upon completion of the adjustment the message „“AIxy adjust-e text line for 3 seconds, and an adjustment the first line of the display and then saved.

djustment.

stment menu:

rt circuit on the sensor!


14.4.2 Example: Adjusting a teletransmitter, 1500 ohms, on AI0

The menu items for teletransmitter adjustment can be selected only if “teletransmitter“ or for “0/4... 20 mA“. The adjustment procedure is the srequired when the teletransmitter or a measuring signal (e.g. position fesuring value.

ApplicationPosition feedback with potentiometer via teletransmitter input (AI01 or Pcurrent input AI02, 0...20 mA.

Fig. 14-7Z-19134

ed“ appears in thvalue is written in

Enter

This completes a

3. Exit adju<Esc>

4. Undo the sho

42/61-10010 EN

mentect the adjustment function from the Service nu by actuating <Enter> several times.e „AI01 Start“ prompts you to set the tele-echanically to its initial position.

the teletransmitter mechanically to its initial ition.

nfirm the message “AI01 Start“ with <Enter> .is carried out, and the message “AI01 End“

djustment the teletransmitter mechanically to its end ition.

nfirm the message “AI01 End“ with <Enter>.

e “AI01 calibrated!“ indicates that you are re- next higher operating level. to return to the main operating level.


Fig. 14-8Z-19135

Fig. 14-9Z-19136

Zero adjust1. Sel

meThe messagtransmitter m2. Set

pos3. CoAdjustment appears.

End value a4. Set

pos5. Co

The messagturned to thePress <Esc>

135

14.5 Calibration

quired in some exceptional cases.

nit. External transmitters with the appropriate

02 of the basic unit for calibration for the con-

the terminals. Press <> and <> to set the


Refer to the tables in Section 17 for the complete calibration routines.

CautionThe inputs and outputs are calibrated in factory. Recalibrating is only re

The calibration routine is used to calibrate the two inputs of the basic uaccuracy are required for this.When calling up the calibration routine, you can select input AI01 or AIfigured type of measurement.

The exact measuring values in the specified ranges must be applied todisplay to the applied value and then confirm with <Enter>.

Example: Calibrating mA-input AI01

Fig. 14-10 Calibrating mA-input AI01Z-19075

!

42/61-10010 EN

15 Supervisor

l 3. menu level

SET MASTER RESET ?

EscMenu

Enter Enter

136 Digitric 100, Chapter 15 "Supervisor"

Fig. 15-1

Operation level 1. menu level 2. menu leve

Indication 2 MASTER REOperate 2 PlausibilitySelftune TemplateParameterConfigurationServiceSupervisor

EscMenu Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

137

15.1 Plausibility

ility check function is used to check the en- the configuration mode for correctness ands.

ting the plausibility function, the systemu to activate or deactivate the plausibility

gle between questions:>, <>

nfirm question:er n mark will disappear.

lausibility function the message seen in Fig.s when you exit the configuration mode.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 15 "Supervisor"

Fig. 15-2 Activating the plausibility checkZ-19137

Fig. 15-3 Message upon exit from the configuration Z-19138 mode

The plausibtries made incompletenes

After selecprompts yocheck.

1. Tog<

Enter

2. CoEnt

The questioEnter

With active p15-3 appear

42/61-10010 EN

15.2 Master reset

ster reset function you can reset the entire to the factory setting.

reset function will overwrite all user-set con-ta with the factory setting. Only the language emain as is. ect the master reset menuion of the menu item you will be asked wheth- factory setting is to be restored (Fig. 15-4).

nfirm question:ter>

placed with “!“. The factory setting will be re-sages on the screen indicate the progress of re. You will be returned to the operation level y.

ncel:c>

138 Digitric 100, Chapter 15 "Supervisor"

Fig. 15-4 Configuration and master resetZ-19139

With the maconfiguration

CautionThe master figuration dasetting will r1. SelUpon selecter or not the

Enter

Either2. Co

<En

“?“ will be restored, mesthe proceduautomaticallEnter or3. Ca

<Es

139

15.3 Template (Quick configuration)his function helps you to realize pre-defined r details.

ller to a pre-defined configuration without the

n data will be overwritten and, thus, lost!

in the template menu.

ntroller. The configuration data loaded with d.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 15 "Supervisor"

The “Template“ menu is used for quick configuration of the controller. Tsettings quickly. See the “Quick configuration“ section of this manual fo

Similar to the master reset function the template function sets the contronecessity to use the configuration menu. Note that with this function all user-defined parameters and configuratio

A 5-digit character string and some additional answers can be entered Example: 100A0

This means the template menu allows for a quick configuration of the cothis function can be further modified in the configuration menu if requireParameters can be set as usual in the “Parameter“ menu.

Refer to Section 16 for details about the template.

42/61-10010 EN

16 Quick configuration in the Template menuto English user language. Otherwise, set it toating instructions instead. Since the controllerglish language.

d for quickly configuring the Digitric 100 con-n 16.2 describes how to navigate through the

e Section 16.4 for an overview of the possible

Section 16.5 for an overview of the possible

ction 16.6 for an overview of the possible vari-

.

nfiguration.

tten and cannot be restored.

required. It is, for example, possible to changect“.

u.

potentiometers) usually require further adjust-

140 Digitric 100, Chapter 16 "Quick configuration in the Template menu"

Prior to executing the template first make sure that the controller is set English (see Section 16.1 for details) or use the German or French operis usually set to the German language ex factory, you might set it to En

The template available under the Supervisor/Template menu item is usetroller. See Fig. 16-1 for details about how to select the template. Sectiotemplate. Possible entries are described in Section 16.3.

A 5-digit template variant is the core of the template.The first digit defines the base variant of the controller configuration. Sevariants.

The second digit is the sub variant for the controller configuration. Seevariants.

The third digit is the alarm variant of the controller configuration. See Seants.

The fourth digit defines the type of universal controller input AI01.The fifth digit defines the type of optional universal controller input AI02See Section 16.7 for an overview of the possible variants.

Upon execution of the template the controller is booted with the new co

CautionThe previous configuration and parameter settings will be overwri

The configuration can be further optimized in the Configuration menu, if the valve action from “Reverse“ (default setting in the template) to “Dire

The parameter settings can be further optimized in the Parameters men

2-wire Pt 100 resistance thermometers and resistance teletransmitters (ment under “Service/Adjustment“.

!

141

Start menuof template

Enter

EscMenu

5-digit template variant

Navigation in template according

16.2

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 16 "Quick configuration in the Template menu"

Fig. 16-1 Controller menu

Operation 1. menu level 2. menu levellevel

Indication 2 MASTER RESET

Operate 2 TemplateSelftune PlausibilityParameterConfigurationServiceSupervisor

EscMenu

Enter Enter

EscMenu

EscMenu

42/61-10010 EN

16.1 Setting the controller to the desired language

ebene Editierenu level editingu du menu Edition

EUTSCH 1 DEUTSCH2 ENGLISH3 FRANCAIS

NGLISH 1 DEUTSCH2 ENGLISH3 FRANCAIS

RANCAIS 1 DEUTSCH2 ENGLISH3 FRANCAIS

Enter

Enterndernit/editer

bestätigen/confirm/accepter

EscMenu

verwerfen/abbort/rejecter


Bedienebene 1. Menüebene 2. Menüebene 3. Menüebene 4.Menüoperation mode 1. menu level 2. menu level 3. menu level 4. menMode d'operation 1.niveau du menu 2.niveau du menu 3.niveau du menu 4.nivea

Anzeige 2 GERÄT B01 SPRACHE F01 DBedienen 2 AE-DEFINITION B02 BINÄREINGÄNGESelbstparam. AA-DEFINITION B03 BINÄRFLAGSParameter BEA-DEFINIT. B04 FERNBEDIENUNGKonfi LOOP1 B05 BINÄRAUSGÄNGEService PROGRAMMGEBER B06 DISPLAY/FARBESupervisor … ….

Indication 2 INSTRUMENT B01 LANGUAGE Q01 EOperate 2 AI-DEFINITION B02 BIN. INPUTSSelftune AO-DEFINITION B03 BIN. FLAGSParameter BIO-DEFINIT. B04 REMOTE OPER.Configuration LOOP1 B05 BIN. OUTPUTSService PROGRAMMER B06 LCD/COLOURSupervisor … ….

Indication 2 APPAREIL B01 LANGUE Q01 FConduite 2 DEFINITION-EA B02 ENTREES TORAutoreglage DEFINITION-SA B03 FLAG-BINParametre DEF.E/S BIN B04 TELECOMM.Confi BOUCLE 1 B05 STORService GENER. PRG B06 LCD/COULEURSuperviseur … ….

EscMenu

EscMenu

Enter Enter Enter

ä/ed

EscMenu

EscMenu

EscMenu

143

16.2 Navigating through the template

shal

l be

activ

ated

Sec

ond

ques

tion

if T

empl

ate

shal

l be

activ

ated

Act

iv. T

empl

. ?

Ent

er

Ent

er

Tem

plat

e

A r

eset

of t

he c

ontr

olle

r in

to t

he a

djus

ted

Tem

plat

e ha

ppen

s. A

t th

e sa

me

time

the

adju

sted

Tem

plat

e w

ill b

e st

ored

. If

you

ente

r th

e Te

rmpl

ate

late

r yo

u w

ill fi

nd t

he t

he m

ade

adju

stm

ents

. A

tte

nti

on

! T

he

fo

rme

r co

nfi

gu

rati

on

an

d p

ara

me

tris

ati

on

wil

l b

e o

verw

ritt

en

!

The

form

er la

ngua

ge a

djus

tmen

t of

the

con

trol

ler

will

be

kept

. Th

e co

ntro

ller

will

sta

rt w

ith t

he n

ew c

onfi g

urat

ion

in t

he o

pera

tion

leve

l. F

urth

er a

djus

tmen

ts o

f co

nfig

urat

ion

and

para

met

risat

ion

can

be d

one

in t

he m

enu

"Con

figur

atio

n" a

nd "

Par

amet

er".

Esc

Men

u

18

to

1) T

he p

ossi

bilit

y to

adj

ust

°F w

ill b

e av

aila

ble

in c

omin

g ve

rsio

ns


Men

u: s

elec

t S

uper

viso

r/T

empl

ate

Tem

pla

te

5-d

igit

T

emp

late

vari

ant

1

00A

0

°C o

r °F

1)

°C (

no

t °F

)

AI0

1-S

CA

LE-L

O0.

0000

AI0

1-S

CA

LE-H

I10

0.00

AI0

1-D

IM_*

***

%

AI0

2-S

CA

LE-L

O0.

0000

AI0

2-S

CA

LE-H

I10

0.00

AI0

2-D

IM_*

***

%

Que

stio

n if

Tem

plat

e A

ctiv

. Tem

pl.

Onl

y if

AI0

1 or

A

I02

is d

efin

ed

as P

t100

or

The

rmoc

oupl

e in

put

Onl

y if

AI0

2 is

de

fined

as

0/4-

20m

A in

put

or a

s po

ti-in

put

(exc

ept

mot

oris

ed v

alve

co

ntro

l with

po

sitio

n fe

edba

ck).

Onl

y if

AI0

1 is

de

fined

as

0/4-

20m

A in

put

or a

s P

oti-i

nput

(ex

cept

fo

r po

sitio

ner)

.

**

**

*

Ent

er

Esc

Men

u

Can

cel ?

Esc

Men

u

Edi

t the

ad

just

men

t by

the

keys

Ind

Ent

er

set

ch

ange

s

Ent

er

go t

o ed

iting

Dis

card

all

chan

ges

sin

ce

ente

rin

g t

he

tem

pla

te

Esc

Men

u

disc

ard

chan

ges

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Po

ssib

le in

sert

po

ints

:

Ent

er

Mov

e ac

tive

digi

t. If

pre

ssed

lo

nger

tha

n 3

s de

cim

al p

oint

st

arts

to

mov

e

Cha

nge

activ

e di

git

or

adju

stm

ent.

In t

he c

ase

of t

he 1

. di

git

of a

nu

mbe

r th

ere

is a

m

inus

sig

n be

twee

n 9

and

0

42/61-10010 EN

16.3 Possible entries in the template

11

hl/h

22

kHz

6

Sta

rt v

alu

e of

sca

le A

I02,

th

at m

ean

s m

easu

red

valu

e fo

r 0

or 4

mA

at

the

inp

ut

AI0

2.

AI0

2-S

CA

LE

-LO

7

En

d va

lue

of s

cale

AI0

2,

that

mea

ns

mea

sure

d

valu

e fo

r 20

mA

at

the

inp

ut A

I02.

A

I02-

SC

ALE

-HI

8D

imen

sio

n (u

nits

) of

th

e va

lue

mea

sure

d at

AI0

2

AI0

2-D

IM_*

***

1) T

he p

ossi

bilit

y to

adj

ust

°F w

ill b

e av

aila

ble

in c

omin

g ve

rsio

ns

On

ly if

AI0

2 h

as b

een

d

efin

ed b

y th

e 5.

dig

it o

f th

e T

emp

late

var

ian

t as

0/4

-20m

A in

pu

t or

as p

oti-

inp

ut (

exce

pt

mo

tori

sed

val

ve

con

tro

l with

po

sitio

n

feed

bac

k)

Num

ber

betw

een

-999

9 an

d 99

999,

dec

imal

po

int c

an b

e m

oved

Sam

e as

inse

rt p

oint

5


Inse

rt

po

int

Pre

sen

t ?E

ffec

t of i

np

ut

1Y

es, a

lway

s

Th

e 5-

dig

it T

emp

late

va

rian

t def

ines

the

con

figu

ratio

n o

f th

e co

ntr

olle

r. T

he

Tem

pla

te m

ust

be

cho

sen

to s

uit

the

req

uir

ed c

on

tro

l

°C (n

ot °

F)

°F (n

ot °

C)

1)

3

Sta

rt v

alu

e of

sca

le A

I01,

th

at m

ean

s m

easu

red

valu

e fo

r 0

or 4

mA

at

the

inp

ut

AI0

1.

AI0

1-S

CA

LE

-LO

4

En

d va

lue

of s

cale

AI0

1,

that

mea

ns

mea

sure

d

valu

e fo

r 20

mA

at

the

inp

ut A

I01.

A

I01-

SC

ALE

-HI

5D

imen

sio

n (u

nits

) of

th

e va

lue

mea

sure

d at

AI0

1

AI0

1-D

IM_*

***

****

= d

imen

.0

n

one

2

%3

°

C4

°

F5

m

bar

6

b

ar7

m

3/h

8

k

g/h

9

t/h

10

l/h

****

= d

imen

.

12

pH

13

mm

14

m15

m

/h16

m

V17

V

18

mA

19

A20

s

21

Hz

On

ly if

AI0

1 h

as b

een

d

efin

ed b

y th

e 4.

dig

it o

f th

e T

emp

late

var

ian

t as

0/4

-20m

A in

pu

t or

as p

oti-

inp

ut (

exce

pt

po

sitio

ner

)

Num

ber

betw

een

-999

9 an

d 99

999,

dec

imal

po

int c

an b

e m

oved

2O

nly

if A

I01

or A

I02

are

defin

ed a

s P

t100

or

ther

moc

oupl

e in

put

Def

ines

if te

mpe

ratu

res

are

mea

sure

d in

°C

or

°F

Ch

oic

es o

f in

pu

t

**

**

*

Base variant

Sub variantAlarm variantType input AI01Type input AI02

145

16.4 Basic variants in the template

Sp

lit r

ange

con

trol

w

ith 2

ana

log

outp

uts

(onl

y w

ith a

dditi

onal

m

odul

e A

O3_

mA

)

Rat

io s

tatio

n

Set

poi

nt s

tatio

n

Ala

rm s

tati

on w

ith

bina

r y o

r re

lay

outp

uts

The

sca

ling

of t

he

(unu

sed

) in

put

AI0

1 w

ill

be u

sed

for

scal

ing

of

the

outp

ut A

O01

none

Set

poi

nt r

atio

lim

its in

P

ara/

Lo

op

1/11

5 +

116

7 8 9 10A

larm

val

ues

and

hyst

eres

is h

ave

to b

e pa

ram

etris

ed.

See

al

arm

var

iant

s xx

Cxx

, xx

Dxx

, xx

Ixx

and

xxJx

x

none

none

none

Ana

log

inpu

t

Ana

log

outp

ut 4

-20m

A

C

ontr

olle

r

SP

1(no

par

amet

er)

A

nalo

g ou

tput

4-2

0mA

AO

01P

VO

UT1

AO

11O

UT2

PI

+-

AI0

1

Ana

log

inpu

t

A

nalo

g ou

tput

4-2

0 m

A

Rsp

1 R

atio

set

poin

t

AO

01P

VO

UT

AI0

1

A

nalo

g ou

tput

4-

20 m

A

S

P1(

no p

aram

eter

)A

O01

OU

T

Ana

log

inpu

t

B

inar

y ou

tput

s/re

lays

P

VA

I01

Ala

rm v

alue

s ac

c. a

larm

va

riant

xxX

xx

BO

0x

BO

0yA

larm

s

Ala

rms


Tab

le o

f B

ase

vari

ants

(1.

dig

it in

5-d

igit

Tem

pla

te-c

od

e)

Adj

ust

ing

of P

I pa

ram

eter

s

Adj

ustin

g o

f sp

ecifi

c pa

ram

eter

s of

the

chos

en

cont

rol t

ype

Co

ntin

uous

co

ntro

ller

On/

Off

co

ntro

ller

(tim

e pr

opor

tione

d re

lay

outp

ut)

Hea

t-0-

Co

ol c

ontr

ol

(3-p

oint

) w

ith 2

rel

ay

outp

uts

Hea

t-0-

Co

ol c

ontr

ol

with

rel

ay (

Coo

l) an

d an

alog

out

put (

Hea

t)

Mot

oris

ed v

alve

co

ntro

l with

2 r

elay

o

utp

uts

(for

ele

ctric

ac

tuat

or)

B

ase

vari

ant

/

ty

pe

con

tro

l

Co

ntr

ol s

chem

e

PI-

cont

rol,

anal

og o

utpu

ts 4

-20

mA

, sca

led

on 0

to

100%

, one

inte

rnal

set

poi

nt S

P1,

man

ual/a

utom

atic

m

ode

to b

e sw

itche

d vi

a ke

y. T

he m

anua

l ch

arac

teris

tic is

for

cont

rolle

rs w

ith o

ne c

ontr

ol o

utpu

t O

UT

(1)

"dire

ct",

for

cont

rolle

rs w

ith d

ual o

utpu

ts

OU

T2/

OU

T1

it is

"in

vers

e-di

rect

". T

he a

utom

atic

ch

arac

teris

tic is

"in

vers

e".

No

tes

for

par

amet

risa

tion

Sw

itche

s/m

inut

e O

UT

1:P

ara/

Lo

op

1/57

=va

lue

fact

ory

sett

ing:

6/m

inS

witc

hes/

min

ute

OU

T2:

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

58=

valu

efa

ctor

yset

ting:

6/m

in

Sw

itche

s/m

inut

e O

UT

1:P

ara/

Lo

op

1/57

=va

lue

fact

ory

sett

ing:

6/m

in

Sw

itche

s/m

inut

e O

UT

2:P

ara/

Lo

op

1/58

=va

lue

fact

ory

sett

ing:

6/m

in

Min

imum

On-

time

of

rela

y ou

tput

s:

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

56=

valu

efa

ctor

y se

ttin

g:0,

05 s

none

1 2 3 4 5

Par

amet

risat

ion

OU

T

or O

UT

1:

Gai

n:P

ara/

Lo

op

1/1=

valu

efa

ctor

y se

ttin

g: G

=1

Res

et t

ime

Tr

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

2=va

lue

fact

ory

sett

ing:

T

r=0.

1min

Par

amet

risat

ion

OU

T2

(not

for

mot

oris

ed

valv

e co

ntro

l and

po

sitio

ner)

:

Gai

n:P

ara/

Lo

op

1/25

=va

lue

fact

ory

sett

ing

G=

1

Res

et t

ime

Tr:

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

26=

Wer

tfa

ctor

y se

ttin

g:

Tr=

0.1m

in

**

**

*A

nalo

g in

put

Ana

log

outp

ut

C

ontr

olle

r

4-2

0 m

A

AO

01P

IP

VO

UT

AI0

1+

-S

P1

(no

para

met

er)

Ana

log

inpu

t

Rel

ay

C

ontr

olle

r

BO

04P

IP

VO

UT

+-

AI0

1

SP

1 (n

o pa

ram

eter

)

Ana

log

inpu

t

R

elay

"H

eat"

Con

trol

ler

SP

1(no

par

amet

er)

AI0

1B

O03

PV

OU

T1

BO

04O

UT2

PI

+-

R

elay

"C

ool"

Ana

log

inpu

t

A

nalo

g ou

tput

"H

eat"

4-2

0mA

Con

trol

ler

SP

1(no

par

amet

er)

AO

01P

VO

UT

1

BO

04O

UT

2P

I+

-A

I01

Rel

ay “

Coo

l”

Ana

log

inpu

t

R

elay

"O

pen"

Con

trol

ler

SP

1(no

par

amet

er)

BO

03P

VO

UT1

BO

04O

UT2

PI

+-

AI0

1

Rel

ay ”

Clo

se”

Po

sitio

ner

(mot

oris

ed v

alve

co

ntro

l with

pos

ition

fe

edba

ck b

eing

the

PV

)

Min

imum

On-

time

of

rela

y ou

tput

s (f

acto

ry

sett

ing=

0,05

s)

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

56=

valu

e po

sitio

n m

inim

um:

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

67=

Min

. po

sitio

n m

axim

um:

Par

a/L

oo

p1/

68=

Max

.6

Dea

d zo

ne (

in%

of

scal

e)P

ara/

Lo

op

1/55

=va

lue

If |E

RR

| < D

ead

zone

, O

UT

will

be

froz

en (

im

port

ant

for

mot

oris

ed

valv

e co

ntro

l +

posi

tione

r, b

oth

rela

ys

will

be

"ope

n")

Ana

log

inpu

t

R

elay

“O

pen”

C

ontr

olle

r

R

elay

“Clo

se”

BO

03P

osi

tio

n

=PV

OU

T1

BO

04O

UT

2P

IA

I01

+-

SP

1 (

no p

aram

eter

)

Ana

log-

and

D

igita

l dis

play

OU

T

show

s po

sitio

n

Lim

iting

of

Pos

ition

(m

in a

nd m

ax)

42/61-10010 EN

16.5 Additional variants in the template

posi

tion

is v

isib

le a

t the

con

trol

ler

and

can

be li

mite

d.

scal

ing

of A

I02.

w

ith A

I02

Lim

iting

of

Pos

ition

(min

and

max

)

Ana

log-

and

Dig

i- ta

l dis

play

OU

T

show

s po

sitio

n

AI0

2


Tab

le o

f S

ub

var

ian

ts (

2.d

igit

of

5-d

igit

Tem

pla

te-c

od

e)

Th

e b

ase

con

tro

l (B

ase

vari

ant)

will

be

exte

nd

ed o

r m

od

ifie

d a

cco

rdin

g t

he

cho

sen

Su

b v

aria

nt

. Wit

h

"?"

mar

ked

or

stri

ped

ele

men

ts a

re a

cco

rdin

g t

he

cho

sen

Bas

e va

rian

t

Ad

dit

on

al

par

amet

risa

tio

nL

imit

atio

ns

No

Ext

ras.

The

Bas

e va

riant

will

no

t be

mod

ified

at a

llS

ee B

ase

vari

ant

--

Ad

dit

ion

al e

xter

nal

set

po

int

at

AI0

2. T

his

SP

ext e

xist

s in

add

ition

to

the

inte

rnal

set

poin

t SP

1. F

or

Bas

e va

riant

8 th

ere

will

be

inst

ead

of s

et p

oint

s S

Pex

t and

SP

1 th

e R

atio

set

poi

nts

Rsp

ext a

nd R

sp1

-

No

t po

ssib

le fo

r B

ase

vari

ant 1

0.

Th

e in

stru

men

t m

ust

be

equ

iped

w

ith A

I02

Rat

io c

on

tro

l A/B

, dis

pla

y R

pv,

R

sp in

%.

The

val

ue A

will

be

cont

rolle

d in

that

man

ner,

that

a s

et

ratio

to a

mea

sure

d va

lue

B w

ill b

e ac

hiev

ed.T

he d

ispl

ay s

how

s th

e ra

tios

Rpv

and

Rsp

in %

Rat

io c

on

tro

l A/(

A+

B),

dis

pla

y R

pv,

Rsp

in%

. T

he v

alue

A w

ill

be c

ontr

olle

d in

that

man

ner,

that

a

set r

atio

to th

e su

m o

f A a

nd a

m

easu

red

valu

e B

will

be

achi

eved

.The

dis

play

sho

ws

the

ratio

s R

pv a

nd R

sp in

%

Su

b v

aria

nt/

ext

ensi

on

No

t po

ssib

le fo

r B

ase

vari

ants

8,

9 an

d 1

0. T

he

inst

rum

ent m

ust

b

e eq

uip

ed w

ith

AI0

2

Rat

io s

etpo

int-

limiti

ng:

min

imum

: P

ara/

Lo

op1/

115=

Min

. m

axim

um:

Par

a/L

oop

1/11

6=M

ax.

0 A CB

**

**

*

Ana

log

inpu

t

Out

put

C

ontr

olle

r

S

P1(

inte

rnal

set

poin

t)

+-

PV

AI0

1

OU

T1

OU

T2

?

SP

ext

??P

I

SP

-wA

I02

Ana

log

inpu

t

Out

put

C

ontr

olle

r

Rsp

1 (

ratio

set

poin

t)

A(P

V)

AI0

1+

OU

T1

OU

T2

?B

AI0

2

??

-P

I

Ana

log

inpu

t

Out

put

C

ontr

olle

r

B

*Rsp

(

1-R

sp)

Rsp

1 (r

atio

set

poin

t)

A(P

V)

AI0

1

B

PI

AI0

2

OU

T1

OU

T2

???

+-

Pro

cess

val

ue a

s lin

ear

com

bina

tion

of 2

mea

sure

d va

lues

Out

of t

he m

easu

red

valu

es a

t the

inpu

ts A

I01

and

AI0

2 a

set p

oint

can

be

calc

ulat

ed b

y fo

llow

ing

equa

tion:

P

V=C

ON

ST

1*IC

1+

CO

NS

T2*(

IC2+

100*

CO

NS

T3)

Con

stan

t 1:

P

ara/

Lo

op1/

101=

valu

e C

onst

ant

2:

Par

a/L

oop

1/10

2=va

lue

Con

stan

t 3:

P

ara/

Lo

op1/

103=

valu

e N

ote:

Als

o ne

gativ

va

lues

are

pos

sibl

e

Pro

cess

val

ue a

s m

ultip

licat

ion

of 2

mea

sure

d va

lues

The

pro

cess

val

ue w

ill b

e ca

lcul

ated

out

of 2

mea

sure

d va

lues

at t

he in

puts

AI0

1 an

d A

I02

acco

rdin

g th

e eq

uatio

n:

PV

=IC

1*(I

C2+

100*

CO

NS

T3)

Con

stan

te 3

: P

ara/

Lo

op1/

103=

Wer

t N

ote:

Als

o ne

gativ

va

lues

are

pos

sibl

e

posi

tion

feed

back

for

mot

ori

sed

va

lve

cont

rol (

Bas

e va

rian

t 5) o

n A

I02.

The

pos

ition

of t

he e

lect

ric

actu

ator

(va

lve,

but

terf

ly v

alve

et

c.)

is m

easu

red

at A

I02.

The

Lim

iting

of

posi

tion

po

sitio

n m

inim

um:

Par

a./L

oop

1/67

=M

in.

posi

tion

max

imum

: P

ara.

/Loo

p1/

68=

Max

. N

ote:

The

val

ues

of M

in

and

Max

rel

ate

to t

he

On

ly p

oss

ible

for

Bas

e va

rian

t 5.

Th

e in

stru

men

t m

ust

be

equ

iped

No

t po

ssib

le fo

r B

ase

vari

ants

6,

9 an

d 1

0. T

he

inst

rum

ent m

ust

b

e eq

uip

ed w

ith

AI0

2

D E F

Ana

log

inpu

t

Out

put

Con

trol

ler

S

P1

IC1

OU

T1

OU

T2

?IC

2A

I02

??+

-P

IA

I01

PV

=C

ON

ST

1*

IC1

+

CO

NS

T2*

(IC

2 +

100

*

CO

NS

T3)

OU

T1

OU

T2 ?

Ana

log

inpu

ts

Out

put

Con

trol

ler

S

P1

IC1

IC2

AI0

2

??

AI0

1+

-P

V =

IC1*

(IC

2+

100*

C

ON

ST

3)

PI

Ana

log

inpu

t

R

elay

"O

pen"

SP

1

(no

para

met

er)

Rel

ay “C

lose

”

PV

+-

AI0

1

Pos

i.

BO

03O

UT

1

BO

04O

UT2

PI

147

Additional variants in the template, continued


Red

uctio

n to

man

ual s

tatio

n (n

o co

ntr

ol) .

OU

T c

an b

e se

t m

anua

lly o

r au

tom

atic

ally

via

inpu

t A

I01.

If c

hang

eove

r to

au

tom

atic

mod

e vi

a ke

y "M

AN

/AU

TO

" sh

all b

e di

sabl

ed y

ou h

ave

to

conf

i gur

e af

ter

activ

atin

g th

e te

mpl

ate

in t

he li

st

conf

igur

atio

n: L

1-B

07-

Q01

=2

(onl

y m

anua

l m

ode

poss

ible

)

Feed

forw

ard

. A d

istu

rban

ce

mea

sure

d at

AI0

2 ca

n be

feed

ed

forw

ard

(add

ed)

to O

UT

.

The

inte

nsity

of

the

dist

urba

nce

can

be

adju

sted

by

the

scal

ing

of A

I02

(if A

I02

is

defin

ed a

s m

A-in

put)

Ext

ensi

on a

s se

rial

bac

kup

co

ntro

ller.

The

out

put o

f a

exte

rnal

mas

ter-

cont

rolle

r w

ill b

e us

ed a

s O

UT

of t

he c

ontr

olle

r if

digi

tal (

bina

ry)

inpu

t BI0

1 is

act

iv. I

f B

I01

is n

ot a

ctiv

(m

aste

r=de

ad)

the

cont

rolle

r w

ill ta

ke o

ver

the

cont

rol.

The

take

ove

r w

ill h

appe

n w

ithou

t jum

p of

OU

T, t

hat m

eans

th

e co

ntro

ller

will

trac

k th

e ou

tput

of

the

exte

rnal

mas

ter.

The

co

ntro

ller

is a

lway

s in

aut

omat

ic

mod

e, th

at m

eans

sw

itchi

ng to

m

anua

l mod

e is

dea

ctiv

ated

(e

xcep

t sen

sor

brea

k at

AI0

1).

War

nin

g !

At s

enso

r br

eak

at A

I01

the

con

tro

ller

wil

l be

set

to

m

anu

al m

ode

(eve

n i

f M

aste

r is

act

iv)

No

t po

ssib

le fo

r B

ase

vari

ants

5,

6, 8

, 9 a

nd

10.

F

or

feed

forw

ard

an

d s

eria

l bac

k u

p th

e in

stru

men

t mu

st

be

equ

iped

with

A

I02.

G H I

Ana

log

inpu

t

Out

put

C

ontr

olle

r

S

P1

OU

T1

OU

T2

???

PI

AI0

1+

+

AI0

2

Pro

cess

PV

+-

Dis

turb

ance

Dis

turb

-an

ce

Mas

ter

LO

OP

1

O

utpu

tA

nalo

g in

put

C

ontr

olle

r

SP

1

Pro

cess

OU

T1

OU

T2

???

OU

TA d

oes

not e

xist

for

Bas

e va

rian

t 1(

cont

in.

cont

rolle

r) A

O01

is th

ere

al c

ontr

olou

tput

OU

T1

AO

01O

UT

A

PV

OU

T M

aste

r

BO

(1=M

aste

r ac

tive)

PV

OU

T C

on.

AI0

1

AI0

2

BI0

1

+-

PI

Inst

rum

ent

Bin

ary

inpu

t 24

VO

utpu

t 4-2

0mA

cont

rolle

r

Ana

log

inpu

t

O

utpu

ts

PV

OU

T1

OU

T2 ?

??A

I01

Dis

play

Mor

e

Less

M A

42/61-10010 EN

16.6 Alarm variants in the template

Ala

rms

ER

Rm

in2

and

E

RR

max

2 to

BO

05

9x

xxx

10xx

xx

xB

xxx

xCxx

x

xG

xxx

Ala

rms

ER

Rm

in1

and

E

RR

max

1 to

BO

01.

Ala

rms

ER

Rm

in2

and

E

RR

max

2 to

BO

02

Not

pos

sibl

e fo

r:

9xxx

x

10

xxxx

xBxx

x

xC

xxx

xGxx

x

xI

xxx

Par

a./L

oop1

/91

= E

RR

min

1

fact

ory

setti

ng: +

9999

9 P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

2 =

ER

Rm

ax1

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9 P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

3 =

ER

Rm

in2

fact

ory

setti

ng: +

9999

9 P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

4 =

ER

Rm

ax2

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9 P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

5 =

Hys

tere

sis

fact

ory

setti

ng:1

.000

0

ER

Rm

ax1

to B

O0x

. Ala

rm

ER

Rm

in2

and

ER

Rm

ax2

to

BO

0y.

T

he d

igita

l out

put B

O0x

will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V <

SP

- E

RR

min

1 (A

L1)

P

V >

SP

+ E

RR

max

1 (A

L2)

T

he d

igita

l out

put B

O0y

will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V <

SP

- E

RR

min

2 (A

L3)

P

V >

SP

+ E

RR

max

2 (A

L4)

T

he d

eact

ivat

ion

happ

ens

with

a

hyst

eres

is H

FE

=Hys

tere

sis

BO

0yB

O0x

ER

Rm

ax2

PV

SP

ER

Rm

in2

ER

Rm

ax1

ER

Rm

in1

(AL4

)

(AL

3)

(AL2

)

(AL1

)


Ala

rms

ER

Rm

in1

and

E

RR

max

1 to

BO

03.

Not

pos

sibl

e fo

r:

3xxx

x

5x

xxx

6xxx

x

A

larm

ER

Rm

in1

and

Tab

le o

f A

larm

var

ian

ts (

3.d

igit

in 5

-dig

it T

emp

late

-co

de)

Sch

eme

of A

larm

s co

nn

ecte

d t

o d

igit

al

ou

tpu

tsP

aram

etri

sati

on

Lim

itat

ion

s

--

No

t fo

r B

ase

vari

ant

10

Ala

rms

to B

O05

(R

elay

N

O-

con

tact

)

Ala

rms

to B

O02

(2

4V

Tra

ns-

isto

r)

Ala

rms

PV

min

1 an

d

PV

max

1 to

B

O03

. A

larm

s P

Vm

in2

and

P

Vm

ax2

to

BO

05

No

t p

oss

ible

fo

r:

3xxx

x

5x

xxx

6xxx

x

9x

xxx

xBxx

x

xC

xxx

Ala

rms

PV

min

1 an

d

PV

max

1 to

B

O01

. A

larm

s P

Vm

in2

and

P

Vm

ax2

to

BO

02

No

t p

oss

ible

fo

r:

9xxx

x

xB

xxx

xCxx

x

xI

xxx

Ala

rm P

Vm

in1

and

PV

max

1 to

BO

0x. A

larm

PV

min

2 an

d

PV

max

2 to

BO

0y.

T

he d

igita

l out

put B

O0x

will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V <

PV

min

1 (A

L1)

P

V >

PV

max

1 (A

L2)

T

he d

igita

l out

put B

O0y

will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V <

PV

min

2 (A

L3)

P

V >

PV

max

2 (A

L4)

T

he d

eact

ivat

ion

happ

ens

with

a

hys

tere

sis

H

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

91 =

PV

min

1

fa

ctor

y se

tting

: -99

99

P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/92

= P

Vm

ax1

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

93 =

PV

min

2

fa

ctor

y se

tting

: -99

99

P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/94

= P

Vm

ax2

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

95 =

Hys

tere

sis

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:1.0

000

No

t p

oss

ible

for:

xB

xxx

xCxx

x

xG

xxx

9xxx

x

10

xxxx

Ala

rm v

aria

nt

No

ala

rms

on

Dig

ital o

utp

uts

.

Co

llect

ive

alar

m P

Vm

in,

PV

max

, ER

Rm

in,

ER

Rm

ax to

on

e d

igita

l o

utp

ut.

The

dig

ital o

utpu

t will

be

ac

tiva

ted

if

P

V <

PV

min

(AL

1)

P

V >

PV

max

(AL

2)

PV

< S

P-E

RR

min

(AL

3)

X

> S

P+E

RR

max

(AL

4)

T

he d

eac

tivat

ion

happ

ens

with

a h

yste

resi

s H

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

91 =

PV

min

fa

ctor

y se

tting

: -99

99

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

92 =

PV

max

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9 P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/93

= E

RR

min

fact

ory

setti

ng: +

9999

9 P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/94

= E

RR

max

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9 P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/95

= H

yste

resi

s

fact

ory

setti

ng:1

.000

0

0 A B C D

**

**

*

ER

Rm

in

BO

05

=Hys

tere

sisPV

SP

PV

min

PV

max

ER

Rm

ax

(AL

2)

(AL

1)

(AL

4)

(AL

3)

PV

min

2

PV

max

2

PV

max

1

PV

min

1

BO

0y

=Hys

tere

sis

BO

0x

PV

(AL

2)

(AL3

)

(AL

1)

(AL

4)

149

Alarm variants in the template, continued

Ala

rm t

o

BO

02

Onl

y fo

r va

rian

ts

xBxx

x

xC

xxx

poss

ible

on

e d

igita

l ou

tpu

t.

The

dig

ital o

utpu

t will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V <

PV

min

(A

L1)

P

V >

PV

max

(AL

2)

Rat

io <

Rm

in (A

L3)

R

atio

> R

max

(AL

4)

The

dea

ctiv

atio

n ha

ppen

s w

ith a

hys

tere

sis

H

fact

ory

setti

ng: -

9999

Par

a./L

oop1

/92

= P

Vm

ax

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:+99

999

P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

3 =

Rm

in

fact

ory

setti

ng: 0

.000

0

Par

a./L

oop1

/94

= R

max

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:+99

999

P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

5 =

Hys

tere

sis

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:1.0

000

L

=Hys

tere

sis

PV

min

Rat

iom

ax

PV

BO

0x

Rat

io

(AL

1)

(AL

3)


Ala

rm

PV

min

to

B

O03

, P

Vm

ax

to B

O04

Not

pos

sibl

e fo

r:

3xxx

x

5x

xxx

6xxx

x

9x

xxx

xBxx

x

xC

xxx

Ala

rm

PV

min

to

B

O01

, P

Vm

ax

to B

O02

Not

pos

sibl

e fo

r:

9xxx

x

xB

xxx

xCxx

x

xI

xxx

Ala

rm P

Vm

in to

BO

0x,

PV

max

to B

O0y

The

dig

ital o

utpu

t BO

0x w

ill

be a

ctiv

ated

if:

PV

< P

Vm

in (A

L1)

The

dig

ital o

utpu

t BO

0y w

ill

be a

ctiv

ated

if

PV

> P

Vm

ax (

AL

2)

The

dea

ctiv

atio

n w

ill

happ

en w

ith a

hys

tere

sis

H

Par

a./L

oop1

/91

= P

Vm

in

fact

ory

setti

ng: -

9999

Par

a./L

oop1

/92

= P

Vm

ax

fa

ctor

y se

tting

: +99

999

P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

5 =

Hys

tere

sis

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:1.0

000

I JP

V

PV

min

PV

max

BO

0y

=Hys

tere

sis

BO

0x

(AL

2)

(AL

1)

Ala

rm t

o

BO

05C

olle

ctiv

e al

arm

Rm

in,

Rm

ax, P

Vm

in, P

Vm

ax to

P

ara.

/Loo

p1/9

1 =

PV

min

K

PV

max

Rat

iom

in

(AL

2)

(AL

4)

Ala

rm

PV

min

an

d

ER

Rm

in to

B

O03

. A

larm

P

Vm

ax a

nd

E

RR

max

to

BO

05

No

t p

oss

ible

fo

r:

3xxx

x

5x

xxx

6xxx

x

9x

xxx

10xx

xx

xB

xxx

xCxx

x

xG

xxx

Ala

rm

PV

min

an

d

ER

Rm

in to

B

O01

. A

larm

P

Vm

ax a

nd

E

RR

max

to

BO

02

No

t p

oss

ible

fo

r:

9xxx

x

10

xxxx

xBxx

x

xC

xxx

xGxx

x

xI

xxx

Ala

rm P

Vm

in a

nd

ER

Rm

in

to B

O0x

. Ala

rm P

Vm

ax a

nd

E

RR

max

to B

O0y

. T

he d

igita

l ou

tput

BO

0x w

ill b

e ac

tivat

ed

if:

P

V <

PV

min

(A

L1)

PV

X <

SP

-ER

Rm

in (

AL

3)

T

he d

igita

l out

put B

O0y

will

be

activ

ated

if:

P

V >

PV

max

(A

L2)

PV

> S

P+

ER

Rm

ax (

AL4

)

T

he d

eact

ivat

ion

happ

ens

with

a

hyst

eres

is H

Par

a./L

oop

1/91

= P

Vm

in

fact

ory

setti

ng: -

9999

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

92 =

PV

max

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

93 =

ER

Rm

in

fa

ctor

y se

tting

: +99

999

P

ara.

/Lo

op

1/94

= E

RR

max

fact

ory

setti

ng:+

9999

9

Par

a./L

oo

p1/

95 =

Hys

tere

sis

fa

ctor

y se

tting

:1.0

000

G HP

V

SP

PV

min

PV

max

ER

Rm

ax

ER

Rm

in

BO

0x

=H

yste

resi

s

BO

0y

(AL

2)

(AL

1)

(AL

4)

(AL

3)

42/61-10010 EN

16.7 Type of analog input AI01 and AI02 in the template

Pt

100

2-w

ire

(-

200

to +

800°

C=-

328

to 1

472°

F)

Pt 1

00

2-w

ire

(-

200

to +

800°

C=-

328

to 1

472°

F)

Pt

100

3-w

ire

(-

200

to +

200°

C=-

328

to 3

92 °

F)

Pt 1

00

3-w

ire

(-

200

to +

200°

C=-

328

to 3

92 °

F)

Pt

100

3-w

ire

(-

200

to +

800°

C=-

328

to 1

472°

F)

Pt 1

00

3-w

ire

(-

200

to +

800°

C=-

328

to 1

472°

F)

NN P Q

P QP

t 10

0 4-

wir

e

(-20

0 to

+20

0°C

= -3

28 to

392

°F

)

Pt 1

00

4-w

ire

(-

200

to +

800°

C=-

328

to 1

472°

F)

Po

ti 1

50O

hm

(7

5-20

0 O

hm

)P

oti

150O

hm

(7

5-2

00 O

hm

)

Po

ti 15

00O

hm

(75

0-20

00

Oh

m)

Po

ti 1

500

Oh

m

(7

50-2

000

Oh

m)

Not

e: If

yo

u c

hoo

se t

her

mo

cou

ple

inp

uts

, the

inte

rnal

com

pen

sati

on w

ill b

e ac

tive

T U

T U

R S


Typ

e o

f an

alo

g in

pu

t A

I01

Typ

e o

f an

alo

g in

pu

t A

I02

(4.d

igit

of

Tem

pla

te-c

od

e)(5

.dig

it o

f T

emp

late

-co

de)

Lim

itat

ion

s

No

inp

ut A

I02

Can

on

ly b

e ch

ose

n if

the

vari

ant d

oes

n’t

use

the

anal

og

in

pu

t AI0

2

4-20

mA

4-

20 m

A

0-2

0 m

A

0-20

mA

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

B

(0

to 1

800°

C =

32

to 3

272°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

B

(0

to 1

800°

C =

32

to 3

272°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

D

(0

to 2

300°

C =

32

to 4

172°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

D

(0

to 2

300°

C =

32

to 4

172°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

E

(-

200

to 1

000°

C=

-328

to 1

832°

F)

Th

erm

oc

ou

ple

typ

e E

(-20

0 to

100

0°C

=-3

28 t

o 1

832°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

J

(-

200

to 1

200°

C=

-328

to 2

192°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

J

(-

200

to 1

200°

C=

-328

to

219

2°F

)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

K

(-

200

to 1

400°

C=

-328

to

255

2°F

)T

her

mo

co

up

le ty

pe

K

(-

200

to 1

400°

C=

-328

to

255

2°F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

L

(-

200

to 1

000°

C=

-328

to

183

2°F

)T

her

mo

cou

ple

typ

e L

(-20

0 to

100

0°C

= -3

28 t

o 1

832°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

R

(0

to 1

700°

C =

32

to 3

092°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

R

(0

to

170

0°C

= 3

2 to

309

2°F

)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

S

(0

to 1

800°

C =

32

to 3

272°

F)

Th

erm

oc

ou

ple

typ

e S

(0 t

o 1

800°

C =

32

to 3

272°

F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le ty

pe

T

(-

200

to 4

00°C

=-3

28 to

752

°F)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

T

(-

200

to 4

00°C

=-3

28 t

o 7

52°F

)

Th

erm

oco

up

le t

ype

U

(-

200

to 6

00°C

=-3

28 to

111

2°F

)T

her

mo

co

up

le ty

pe

U

(-

200

to 6

00°C

=-3

28 t

o 1

112°

F)

Pt

100

2-w

ire

(-

200

to +

200°

C=-

328

to 3

92°F

)P

t 10

0 2-

wir

e

(-20

0 to

+20

0°C

=-32

8 to

392

°F)

Typ

e an

alo

g in

pu

t A

I01

Typ

e an

alo

g in

pu

t A

I02

Dig

itric

100

m

ust

be

e

qu

iped

with

o

ptio

nal

inp

ut

AI0

2.

T

he

ch

oic

e is

o

nly

po

ssib

le

if th

e c

ho

sen

va

rian

t use

s th

e an

alo

g

inp

ut A

I02.

A DB EC F G H I J K L M

A DB EC F G H I J K L M0

**

**

*

Th

is i

s th

e o

nly

p

oss

ible

va

ria

nt

for

setp

oin

t st

ati

on

**

**

*

151

16.8 Examples for template variants

type

E

C

ontr

olle

r

R

elay

BO

04P

IO

UT

AI0

1+

-

SP

1 (n

o pa

ram

eter

)

The

rmoc

oupl

e

Man

ual s

tatio

n w

ith

cont

inuo

us o

utpu

t AO

01 (4

-20

mA

). E

xter

nal o

utpu

t at

AI0

1 (4

-20m

A).

1G

0A

0In

put 4

-20m

A

Out

put 4

-20m

A

O

UTe

xtO

UT

AO

01A

I01

Dis

play

Less

M AM

ore


Exa

mp

les

of

Tem

pla

te v

aria

nts

Hea

t-0-C

ool c

ontro

l with

BO

03 a

s tim

e pr

opor

t-io

ning

rela

y "H

eat"

, BO

04 a

s tim

e pr

opor

tioni

ng

rela

y "C

ool".

Ext

erna

l set

poi

nt S

Pex

t at A

I02

(4-

20m

A).

Pro

cess

val

ue P

V a

t AI0

1= P

t100

, 3-w

ire (

200

to +

200

°C).

Col

lect

ive

alar

m P

Vm

in, P

Vm

ax,

ER

Rm

ax, E

RR

min

at r

elay

BO

05

3A

AP

A

SP

ext

PV

Rel

ay "

Hea

t”

Pt1

00,3

-wire

C

ontr

olle

r

R

elay

4-20

mA

SP

1(in

tern

al s

etpo

int)

AI0

1

OU

T1

OU

T2

BO

04

BO

03P

I

SP

-w

+-

AI0

2

Mot

oris

ed v

alve

con

trol (

elec

tric

actu

ator

) with

po

sitio

n fe

edba

ck to

AI0

2 (P

oti 1

500O

hm),

Pro

cess

valu

e P

V a

t AI0

1(4-

20m

A).

BO

03 a

s re

lay

for

"ope

n", B

O04

als

rela

y fo

r "cl

ose"

. Col

lect

ive

alar

m

PV

min

, PV

max

, ER

Rm

in, E

RR

max

at r

elay

BO

05

Ana

log

inpu

t

R

elay

"O

pen"

4-20

mA

Con

trol

ler

SP

1

(no

para

met

er)

Pot

i (75

0-20

00 O

hm)

AI0

2

PV

Lim

iting

of

pos

ition

(m

in a

nd m

ax)

Ana

log-

and

dig

i- ta

l dis

play

of O

UT

sh

ows

posi

tion

+-

AI0

1

Po

si.

BO

03O

UT

1

BO

04O

UT

2P

I

R

elay

"C

lose

"

5F

AU

A

On/

Off

cont

rol w

ith ti

me

prop

ortio

ned

rela

y ou

tput

B

O04

, Pro

cess

val

ue P

V a

t AI0

1(Th

erm

ocou

ple

type

E).

BO

03 a

s re

lay

pre

alar

m (P

Vm

in2

and

PV

max

2), B

O05

as

rela

y m

ain

alar

m (P

Vm

in1

and

PV

max

1).

20

CE

0

ice/Supervisor" 42/61-10010 EN

17 Tables for menus: Indication2/Operate2/Selftune/Service/Supervisor

d

Indication2

ion Parameter

In/outputs

ntification

Lib.ver:3.x.y

152 Digitric 100, Chapter 17 "Tables for menus: Indication2/Operate2/Selftune/Serv

AI01AI02AIxyAO01AOxyBI01BIxyBO01BOxy

G

Tr

Td

MR

Input circuit The adjustment of CONFI/LOOP1/B03/Q01 will be displayed

Control function

The adjustment of CONFI/LOOP1/B01/Q01 will be displayed

Controller output The adjustment of CONFI/LOOP1/B01/Q02 will be displayed

The library version of the IBIS R+ software (PC) belonging to the actual controller firmware will be displaye

The firmware version in the controller will be displayed

Display of all parameters which are defined in the menu PARAMETER (parameters 1 to 199).

Display of the actual value of the manual reset MR of the controller

1.m

enu

2.m

enu 3. menu

level

Display of the actual value of the derivative time Td of the controller (derivative)

description4. menu level /description

Display of the actual value of the Gain G of the controller (proportional)

Display of the actual value of the reset time Tr of the controller (integral)

In/o

utp

uts

In

dic

atio

n2

Ind

icat

ion

2

In

dic

atio

n2

Ind

icat

ion

2

Indication2 Indication2 Indication2 Indication2 Indication2 Indication2

Indication Parameter Indication Parameter Indication Parameter Indicat

In/outputs In/outputs In/outputs In/outputs In/outputs In/outputs

act

. PID

-Par

.

actual PID-Parameters actual PID-Parameters actual PID-Parameters

Id

enti

fica

tio

Identification Identification Identification Identification Identification Ide

Lib.ver:3.x.y Lib.ver:3.x.y Lib.ver:3.x.y Lib.ver:3.x.y Lib.ver:3.x.y

Fw.Vers:01.2yz Fw.Vers:01.2yz Fw.Vers:01.2yz Fw.Vers:01.2yz

Each in/output of the controller whicha) exists

and b) is recognised and assigned and c) is in the configuration activated

can be chosen here. The actual value of the chosen in/output will be displayed.

Example:AI01 105.36 °C

ice/Supervisor" 153

u u

local/remote

2 Operate 2

by <Enter> writing in parameter set 1

by <Enter> writing in parameter set 2

s the calculated control system parameters: Gs, Tu,Tg.

play and editing of calculated Td

splay and editing of calculated G

splay and editing of calculated Tr

Selftune Selftune

1. Parametrisation of the selftune in

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 17 "Tables for menus: Indication2/Operate2/Selftune/Serv

1.m

en2.

men 3. menu

level description4. menu level /description

only local Only local operation via controller front possible

remote>local ? Changeover from remote to local operation via <Enter>

local>remote ? Changeover from local to remote operation via <Enter> Op

erat

e 2

loc/

rem

local/remote local/remote local/remote local/remote

Operate 2 Operate 2 Operate 2 Operate 2 Operate 2 Operate

Only visible while selftune is running

Selft. > Gain

Selft. >Tr

Selft. >Td

accept -> 1?

accept -> 2?

System par.Show

dis

Selftune can be started by <Enter>. After

finalisation you will see blinking: "Selft. ready !". By <Esc> then <Enter>

the display will show you: "Selft. > Gain".

With <⇑> and <⇓> you can step through following displays:

no Selftune

Start Selft.?

cancel Selft.?

di

di

Sel

ftu

ne

S

elft

un

e

Selftune Selftune Selftune Selftune Selftune

Access to seftune is disabled. It can be enabled by CONFI/LOOP1/B01/Q05=PARAMETER/LOOP1/125 to 128


u u

ion by factory

led on main board)ssembled on main board)

Service Service mation Information

Info HardWare Info HardWare

Display Unit Display Unit

S-232/485O3-mAI2-mAmA iO4-RELAISrofibusDP

. . . . ither in CONFI/INSTRUMENT/B12/Q01

ecognised and assigned.


1.m

en2.

men 3. menu


ABB company name

Digitric 100 Device name, Digitric 100

CPU:x CPU version, e.g. x=A

F:x.xxxxxx.x Production number, e.g.: F:6.850291.6F-Dat:dd.mm.yy Production dateConfi-No.:xxxxx Configuration number: 00000=standard ; xxxxx= if custom configuratR-Dat:dd.mm.yy Repair date

empty unused

M1= _ _ _ _ _

AI02= _ _ _ _ _ AI02 exists The optional universal input AI02 is present (assembNo AI02 The optional universal input AI02 is not present (not a

Contrast LCD 0 to 9 Adjustment of the contrast at the LCD display

In

form

atio

n S

ervi

ce

Ser

vice

S

ervi

ce

Service Service Service Service Service Service Information Information Information Information Infor

In

fo H

ard

War

e

Info HardWare Info HardWare Info HardWare Info HardWare

Display Unit Display Unit Display Unit Display Unit

Modules assembled in the controller will be shown. Modules can be e.g.: - R - A - A - B - P - .The module is not ready for the Configuration in general. In fact it has to be emanualy assigned or via CONFI/INSTRUMENT/B11/Q01=1 automatically r

ice/Supervisor" 155

u u

as to be 75 to 200 Ohm)2-wire oder teletransmitter (Poti).

at module). Teletransmitters at done by changing starting point of of scale [CONFI/AI-

measurement values. For Pt-100

start adjustment. Request: "Set irm with <Enter>. After request: r>. Important: the resistance in

nd position.

2-wire oder teletransmitter (Poti).

start adjustment. Request: "Set irm with <Enter>. After request: r>. Important: the resistance in

nd position.

e Pt100 (2 wire) cables to the m the connection cables, then ce at the input now). Start the e message "AI01 adjusted".

to 200 Ohm)

the Pt100 (2 wire) cables to the from the connection cables, then nce at the input now). Start the message "AI02 adjusted".

Adjustment


1.m

en2.

men 3. menu


Basic unit AI01 n.adjust.

AI01 POT1500Adjustment of analog

input AI01 if configured as teletransmitter

1500Ohm

AI01 POT150 see AI01 POT1500 (only difference: the resistance hAI02 n.adjust.

AI02 POT1500Adjustment of input

AI02 if configured as tele-transmitter

1500Ohm (only Digitric

Slot 1

Adjustment only possible if AI02 is configured as Pt100

For Pt-100 2wire identic as in basic unit but with analog Input AIxy (Use pinsthe modul AI2_PT_3/4W cannot be adjusted. The adjustment must there bescale [CONFI/AI-Definition/Bxy/P05= -yclose*100/(yopen-yclose)] and end point Definition/Bxy/P06=(100*(100-yclose))/(yopen-yclose)]).

An adjustment for teletransmitters has to be done to connect start and end position to defined2 wire sensors it is necessary to prevent the influence of the connecting cable resistance.

Connect teletransmitter (poti 750 to 2000 Ohm) to AI02. ThenPot LoEnd", that means bring poti in start position.Then conf"Set Pot HiEnd" bring poti in end position. Confirm with <Ente

start position has to be smaller than in e

Adjustment only possible if AI01 is configured as Pt100

Connect teletransmitter (poti 750 to 2000 Ohm) to AI01. ThenPot LoEnd", that means bring poti in start position.Then conf"Set Pot HiEnd" bring poti in end position. Confirm with <Ente

start position has to be smaller than in e

Warning: don’t do a adjustment with open input ! Connect thcontroller input AI01. Disconnect the Pt100 at the sensor froconnect the two cables (only the connection cable resistan

adjustment. After adjusting you will see for 3 seconds th

AI02 POT150 See AI02 POT1500 (but overall resistance of poti: 75

AI02 Pt100-2W Adjustment of analog

input AI02 if configured as Pt-100 2-wire

Warning: don’t do a adjustment with open input ! Connect controller input AI02. Disconnect the Pt100 at the sensor connect the two cables (only the connection cable resistaadjustment. After adjusting you will see for 3 seconds the

AI01 Pt100-2W Adjustment of analog

input AI01 if configured as Pt-100 2-wire

Ser

vice

S

ervi

ce

Ser

vice

S

ervi

ce

Ser

vice

Ad

just

men

t

A

dju

stm

ent

Ad

just

men

t

A

dju

stm

ent

Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment


u u

rent measurement then start 0 mA then confirm with <Enter>. mA, then confirm with <Enter>. ). Limits: 0mA :-1 to 5 mA ; 20 mA:

alibrated ex factory. If you do a ice to ABB for calibration.

r 4 wire. Digitric 100: connect pins ance. Note: If you use cables the e the same as the cable from pin 9 put", adjust resistance to 0 Ohm, s for 200 and 2000 Ohm. Please nces can be edited (in small m ;2000 Ohm: 2000-2200 Ohm.

igitric 100: connect pins 6+7 with one you use cables the resistance of the e cable from pin 9 to the resistor. Start e to 0 Ohm, then confirm with <Enter>. ase adjust them and confirm with limits). Limits: 0 Ohm: 0-1 Ohm ; 200

Calibration


1.m

en2.

men 3. menu


Warning!

Basic unit

AI01 mA calib? Calibration of analog

input AI01 if configured as 0(4)-20 mA input

AI01 Pt calib? Calibration of analog

input AI01 if configured as Pt 100 input

AI01 Pot calib? Calibration of analog

input AI01 if configured as teletransmitter input

Connect a precision current provider to the input for curcalibraton. After request "0 mA input", adjust current to After further request "20 mA input", adjust current to 20 Note: The currents 0 or 20 can be edited (in small limits15 to 22 mA.

In normal cases there is no need for any calibration as our devices are exactly cincorrect calibration the controller will be useless. If you are unsure give your dev

Connect a precision resistance provider to the inputs fo6+7 with one end, pins 9 with the other end of the resistresistance of the cable from pin 6 to the resisitor must bto the resistor. Start calibration. After request "0 Ohm inthen confirm with <Enter>. There will be further requestadjust them and confirm with <Enter>. Note: The resistalimits). Limits: 0 Ohm: 0-1 Ohm ; 200 Ohm: 180-220 Oh

Connect a precision resistance provider to the inputs. Dend, pins 9 with the other end of the resistance. Note: Ifcable from pin 6 to the resisitor must be the same as thcalibration. After request "0 Ohm input", adjust resistancThere will be further requests for 200 and 400 Ohm. Ple<Enter>. Note: The resistances can be edited (in small Ohm: 180-220 Ohm ; 400 Ohm: 360-450 Ohm.

Cal

ibra

tio

n

C

alib

rati

on

Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration

Ser

vice

Ser

vice

Ser

vice

ice/Supervisor" 157

Digitric 100: connect pins 10+11 tance. Note: If you use cables the t be the same as the cable from pin input", adjust resistance to 0 Ohm, ts for 200 and 400 Ohm. Please tances can be edited (in small hm ; 400 Ohm: 360-450 Ohm.

t AI02. Digitric 100: pin 12="+", pin

ocouple. Digitric 100: pin 7="+", input", adjust voltage to -10 mV, V input", adjust voltage to 80 mV, d 80 mV can be edited (in small mV


1.m

enu

2.m

enu 3. menu


AI01 mV calib? Calibration of analog

input AI01 if configured as thermocouple input

AI02= mA calib? Calibration AI02 if 0(4)-

20 mA input

AI02 Pt calib? Calibration of analog

input AI02 if configured as Pt 100 input

Connect a precision resistance provider to the inputs. with one end, pins 9+13 with the other end of the resisresistance of the cable from pin 10 to the resisitor mus9 to the resistor. Start calibration. After request "0 Ohmthen confirm with <Enter>. There will be further requesadjust them and confirm with <Enter>. Note: The resislimits). Limits: 0 Ohm: 0-1 Ohm ; 200 Ohm: 180-220 O

see calibration of AI01 but use connection pins for Inpu13= "-")

Connect a precision mV provider to the inputs for thermpin 9= "-"), then start calibration. After request "-10 mVthen confirm with <Enter>. After second request "80 mthen confirm with <Enter>. Note: the voltage -10mV anlimits). Limits: -10 mV: -10 to -5 V ; 80 mV: +60 to +85

C

alib

rati

on

Cal

ibra

tio

n

S

ervi

ce

S

ervi

ce


u u

(mA). That means connect pin 8 20 mA will be calibrated). Other mA ; 20 mA: 15 to 22 mA. For s to be calibrated exactly.

igitric 100: connect pins 10+11 nce. Note: If you use cables the

be the same as the cable from pin input", adjust resistance to 0 Ohm, s for 200 and 2000 Ohm. Please nces can be edited (in small m ;2000 Ohm: 2000-2200 Ohm.

vice FC: 00000, means there had en no communication. The time ifference will then show 00000

ary contact ABB for calibration of

ocouple. Digitric 100: pin 11="+", input", adjust voltage to -10 mV, input", adjust voltage to 80 mV, 80mV can be edited (in small V

Comm.- Service


1.m

en2.

men 3. menu


AI02 Pot calib? Calibration of analog

input AI02 if configured as teletransmitter input

AI02 mV calib? Calibration of analog

input AI02 if configured as thermocouple input

AO01= mA calib? Calibration of analog

output Ao01 (0/4-20mA)

Slot1

Modbus Service FC: __ Shows function code of the last Modbus service

Timediff./sec Shows time since the last Modbus service

ProfibusDP Service FC: __ Shows function code of the last Profibus service

Timediff./sec Shows time since the last Profibus service

Connect analog output AO01 (mA) to analog input AI01with 14 and pin 9 with 15:. Then start calibration (0 and values than 0 and 20 can be edited. Limits: omA: 0 to 5correwct calibaration of AO01, the analog input AI01 ha

Connect a precision resistance provider to the inputs. Dwith one end, pins 9+13 with the other end of the resistaresistance of the cable from pin 10 to the resisitor must9 to the resistor. Start calibration. After request "0 Ohmthen confirm with <Enter>. There will be further requestadjust them and confirm with <Enter>. Note: The resistalimits). Limits: 0 Ohm: 0-1 Ohm ; 200 Ohm: 180-220 Oh

Serbed

Analog inputs on modules cannot be calibrated in the controller. If necesssingle modules.

Connect a precision mV provider to the inputs for thermpin 13= "-"), then start calibration. After request "-10 mVthen confirm with <Enter>. After second request "80 mVthen confirm with <Enter>. Note: the voltage -10mV andlimits). Limits: -10 mV: -10 to -5 V ; 80 mV: +60 to +85 m

C

alib

rati

on

Cal

ibra

tio

n

Co

m.-

Ser

.

Comm.- Service Comm.- Service Comm.- Service

Ser

vice

Ser

vice

Ser

vice

Ser

vice

ice/Supervisor" 159

u u

sibility=ON means that there is sibility check activ. That means y plausible configurations and metrisations will be accepted.

lows you a very fast configuration of the paragraph "Template". isation is gone.

". After confirmation with <Enter> on and parametrisation is gone)

Supervisor


1.m

en2.

men 3. menu


Plausib. =OFFAfter pressing of <Enter> you will receive the request "Plausib =ON ?". After confirmation with <Enter> the controller is set on "Plausib = ON".

Plausib. =ONAfter pressing of <Enter> you will receive the re-quest "Plausib =OFF?". After confirmation with <Enter> the controller is set on "Plausib = OFF".

Template

Plausibility

Plauplauonlpara

After pressing of <Enter> you will get into the "Template" The Template althe controller based on a 5-digit code Xxxxx. You will get full instruction inWarning: if you activate the template all former configuration and parametr

MASTER RESETAfter pressing of <Enter> you will receice the request "MASTER RESET ?the controller will be reseted to the factory preset. (Warning: all configurati

Su

per

viso

r

Su

per

viso

r

Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor

42/61-10010 EN

18 Tables for the configuration menu

Alarms

in = -9999ax = +99999min = +99999max = +99999

16 17 18 19 20 21

BO03Relay(NO-contact)



+ AI01- 4-20mA

+ AO01- 4-20mA

BI01

BI02

GROUND -

24 V externally

21 V feed

1514

1312

1110

98

76

54

32

1

Connection pins

evice

ypeA

UT1alog

-

160 Digitric 100, Chapter 18 "Tables for the configuration menu"

Fig. 18-1 Digitric 100 Factory setting

Display

BIO01

BIO02

BI01

BO01

BI02

BO02

Binary In-/Out-definition1)

Base device

Use of Binary InputsIn factory setting no function(but they are active)

Base device

BO01 not activ

BO02 not activ

BO03 Relay

BO04 Relay

BI01

BI02

BO05 Relay

Function of Binary OutputsIn factory setting no function

Binary In- and Outpus 1)

Alarm value 1 = SPmAlarm value 2 = SPmAlarm value 3 = ERRAlarm value 4 = ERR

Alarm values

1) In the base device there are 2 BIO (Binary In/Outputs). BIO01 and BIO02 can be configured as BO (Binary Output) oder BI (Binary Input). BIO03, BIO04

and BIO05 are relays (NO-contacts). Therefore they can be only configured as BO03, BO04 and BO05 (not as Inputs).

Base d

Signal t4-20 m

Control outputContinuous

AO01

Control function1-channel

Oan

Analog

output

Out

Control function

Analog-scale forPV SPand

Start =0%End=100%

Digital displayPV, SP,OUT, ERR

PV, SP

Fixed valueERR = IC1-SP ;Which means:Process valuePV = IC1

LOOP1Input circuit

ERR

Controlalgorithm:PI ;G=1;Tr=0.5

Digital scalefor PV and SP.Start = 0%End = 100%Hence ERR isscaled.

OUT (0 to 100)

Controlalgorithm

0

100

Internal setpoint SP1factory setting: 0

IC1

SP

IC2

LOOP1Rooting IC(Input-circuit)

Setpoints

Base deviceAI01

Type of sensor4-20mALinearisationNoneFilteringNoneDimensionin %Scaling4mA = 0%; 20 mA=100%Sensor breakSensor break value 102%

AI02 Type of sensor4-20mALinearisationNoneFilteringNoneDimensionin %Scaling4mA = 0%; 20 mA=100%Sensor breakSensor break value 102%

AI02notused

Analog-Inputs

AI (Analog- Input)-Configuration

AI01

161

1)In

the

base

devic

eth

ere

are

2B

IO(B

inary

In/O

utp

uts

).E

ach

ofth

em

can

be

configure

das

BO

(Bin

ary

Outp

ut)

oder

BI(B

inary

Input)

.In

the

Dig

itric

100,B

IO3,B

IO4

and

BIO

5are

rela

ys

(NO

-conta

ct)

.T

here

fore

they

can

be

only

configure

das

BO

3,B

O4

und

BO

5(n

otas

Inputs

).2

)W

ith

the

configura

tion

question

"auto

matic

chara

cte

ristic"

you

can

achie

ve

achange

ofth

esig

n(a

uto

matic

chara

cte

ristic

"direct"

inste

ad

ofdefa

ult

"invers

e")

3)W

ith

the

configura

tion

question

"Manualchara

cte

ristic"

you

can

change

the

sig

nofall

used

Outp

utsig

nals

(either

only

OU

T1

or

OU

T1

and

OU

T2).

Change

ofsig

nm

eans

:-

for

Bin

ary

Outp

uts

ain

vers

evalu

e;-

for

Analo

gO

utp

uts

ain

vers

ion

ofth

echara

cte

ristic,th

atm

eans

0to

100%

will

be

pro

jecte

don

100

to0%

.

....

.B

Ixy

BIO

xyB

Oxy

Sw

itchi

ng p

aram

eter

con

trol

Sw

itchi

ng b

etw

een

IC1

and

IC2

Sta

rt o

f pro

gram

sD

eny

acce

ss o

f ope

rato

r..

...

Mod

ule

1B

Ixy

BO

04

BO

03

Mod

ule

1

BO

xy

Sig

nal.

exce

ssiv

e lo

adS

igna

l.se

nsor

bre

akS

igna

l.co

mm

unic

atio

n er

ror

Sig

nal.

alar

ms

....

.

BO

05

1 2 3

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 18 "Tables for the configuration menu"

Fig. 18-2 Basic structure of the list configuration for Loop 1 (continued in Fig. 18-3)

Mod

ule

1

....

..

Bas

e de

vice

AI0

2

AI1

2

AI1

1

AI0

1

Mod

ule

1

....

..A

Ixy

Typ

e o

f se

nso

r0(

4)-2

0mA

,TC

, Pt1

00 .

..L

inea

risa

tio

nS

quar

e ro

ot,T

C-t

ype,

Tabl

e,.

. Filt

erin

gT

ime

cons

t.Lo

w p

ass

Dim

ensi

on

in %

, °C

, bar

, mm

..

Sca

ling

e.g.

:4-2

0mA

= 2

0 to

80°

CS

enso

r b

reak

....

An

alo

g-

Inp

uts

AI (

An

alo

g-

Inp

ut)

-C

on

fig

ura

tio

n

stat

eco

rrec

tion

1AIx

y

AI1

2

AI1

1

AI0

1

AI0

2

Tabl

e4

PV

to O

utpu

t

Onl

y if

setp

oint

stat

ion

BI0

1B

IO01

BO

01

Bin

ary

In-/

Ou

t-d

efin

itio

n1)

Use

of

Bin

ary

Inp

uts

Sw

itchi

ng o

f set

poin

tsS

witc

hing

of o

pera

tion

mod

eA

ctiv

atin

g O

UT-

trac

king

Bas

e de

vice

1)

BI0

2

BI0

1

Bin

ary

Inp

uts

1)

Bas

e de

vice

1)

BO

02

BO

01

Use

of

Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

tsS

igna

lisat

ion

alar

ms

Sig

nalis

atio

n of

ope

ratio

n m

ode

Sig

nalis

atio

n pr

ogra

m e

nd

Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

ts1)

Lim

its, e

.g.:

Pos

ition

min

.,Pos

.max

.P

ositi

on fe

edba

ck, e

.g.

angl

e or

pos

ition

at v

alve

s

Mul

tiplic

atio

nw

ithS

R o

r (1

-S

R)

AIx

yA

Ixy

AIx

yA

Ixy

AIx

yA

Ixy

Set

Rat

io S

R

Set

po

ints

Onl

y if

ratio

stat

ion

Inte

rnal

Set

poin

tsS

P1,

SP

2, S

P3,

SP

4

Ext

erna

l Set

poin

t Sxt

Pro

gram

(ram

p/so

ak)

setp

oint

, up

to 1

0pr

ogra

ms

P01

to P

10

If ra

tio c

ontr

ol:p

ossi

ble

SR

1, S

R2,

SR

3, in

stea

dS

P2,

SP

3,S

P4

Com

pute

r se

tpoi

nt S

PC

IC2

IC1

IC3

IC4

For

IC "

Fix

ed v

alue

"sw

itchi

ng w

ithB

Ixy

poss

ible

SP

SP

min

,S

Pm

ax

poss

ible

100 0L

OO

P1

Ro

oti

ng

IC (

Inp

ut-

circ

uit

)

An

alo

g-

scal

efo

rP

V a

ndS

P.F

ix S

tart

and

End P

VS

P

Dig

ital d

ispl

ay:

PV,

SP,

OU

T,E

RR

alte

rnat

iv if

ratio

:Rac

t, S

R,

OU

T, E

RR

PV,

SP

alte

rnat

iv R

act,S

R

Def

ine

Dim

en-

sion

Fix

ed v

alu

e:E

RR

=IC

1-S

P;P

V=

IC1

Mu

lti c

om

po

nen

ts:

01:

ER

R=

Con

st1*

IC1-

SP

;P

V=

Con

st1*

IC1

...

05:

ER

R=

Con

st1*

IC1-

SP

+C

onst

2*(I

C2+

Con

st3*

IC3)

...

09:

ER

R=

Con

st1*

IC1-

SP

-C

onst

2*(I

C2+

Con

st3*

IC3)

Max

PV

:E

RR

=M

ax(I

C1,

IC2,

IC3)

-SP

Min

PV

:E

RR

=M

in(I

C1,

IC2,

IC3)

-SP

Max

SP

:E

RR

=IC

1-M

ax(S

P,IC

2,IC

3)M

in S

P:

ER

R=

ES

1-M

in(S

P,IC

2,IC

3)

Rat

io A

/B:

ER

R=

IC1-

[R*(

IC2+

Con

st3*

IC3)

+B

ias+

IC4]

Rat

io A

/(A

+B):

ER

R=

IC1-

[R/(

R-1

)*(I

C2+

Con

st3*

IC3)

+B

ias+

IC4]

LO

OP

1 In

pu

t ci

rcu

it

AIx

y

Rat

io s

tatio

n

42/61-10010 EN

with

out f

unct

ion

PV

-MIN

( P

V<

=A

Lx)

PV

-MA

X (

PV

>=

ALx

)E

RR

-MIN

(P

V<

=S

P-A

Lx)

ER

R-M

AX

(P

V>

=S

P+

ALx

)..

...

RAT

IO-M

IN (

R<

=A

Lx)

RAT

IO-M

AX

(R

>=

ALx

)..

...

AL1

AL2

AL3

AL4

Co

nfi

gu

rati

on

of

Ala

rm v

alu

es

Sta

tus

Bin

ary

In-

and

Out

puts

Sig

nalis

atio

n al

arm

sS

igna

lisat

ion

of o

pera

tion

mod

eS

igna

lisat

ion

prog

ram

end

Sig

nal.

exce

ssiv

e lo

adS

igna

l.se

nsor

bre

ak..

....

.

con

nec

tio

nw

ith

fla

gs

Fla

g 1

Fla

g 2

Fla

g 3

Fla

g 4

Fla

g 5

Fla

g 6

BIO

xy

Sig

nal

isat

ion

wit

h f

lag

s 1

to 6

BIx

y

e1)

e


Fig. 18-3 Basic structure of the list configuration for Loop 1, part 2

PV

to O

utpu

t

Set

poin

t sta

tion

Rat

io s

tatio

n

cont

rol f

unct

.:'

m

anua

l sta

tion

auto

stan

dard

With

but

tons

:⇒

or⇐

adju

stin

g of

OU

T

Par

amet

er c

on

tro

lG

ain,

Tr,T

d, M

R a

sfu

nctio

n of

PV,

SP,

OU

T,E

RR

, ..

and

anal

ogin

puts

.Sw

itchi

ng w

ithbi

nary

inpu

ts p

ossi

ble

ER

R

Dea

d Z

on

e:if

ER

R is

sm

all.

+/-

x%

, OU

Tw

ill b

e"fr

ozen

"

Co

ntr

ol

alg

ori

thm

P, P

I,P

D, P

ID

OU

T(0

to 1

00)

ER

RD

IGI

2)se

e be

low

Dig

ital

sca

lefo

r P

V a

nd S

P.F

ix s

tart

+E

nd.H

ence

ER

RD

IGIw

ill b

esc

aled

.

Typ

e o

f co

ntr

ol s

ign

alC

ontin

ous

Spl

it ra

nge

Co

ntr

ol f

un

ctio

n1-

chan

nel

Pos

ition

erR

atio

con

trol

Set

poin

t sta

tion

Man

ual s

tatio

nR

atio

sta

tion

Ala

rm s

tatio

n3)

see

belo

w

Roo

ting

OU

T

Fee

d fo

rwar

dpo

ssib

lem

in a

nd m

axlim

its p

oss.

On/

Off

cont

rol

S+

C

S+

Sor

ste

p co

ntro

ller

Ou

tpu

t

sig

na

lsC

on

tro

l fu

nct

ion

LO

OP

1R

oo

tin

gO

utp

ut

An

alo

go

utp

ut

typ

e

Ana

log

AO

01

AO

12

AO

11

AO

xy

Typ

e o

fsi

gn

al0

..20

mA

4 ..

20 m

A0

..10

V2

..10

Vno

te:V

onl

yin

mod

ules

not u

sed

OU

T2

anal

og

OU

T1

anal

og

Bin

ary

OU

T1

bina

ry

OU

T2

bina

ry

not u

sed

Bas

e de

vic

Mod

ule

1

....

..

Bas

e de

vic

AO

12

AO

11

AO

01

Mod

ule

1

....

..B

Oxy

BO

01

BO

02

BO

03

BO

04

BO

05

Ou

tC

on

tro

lal

go

rith

m

Hea

t(O

UT

1)-O

ff-C

ool(O

UT

2)

Hea

t(O

UT

1)-O

ff-C

ool(O

UT

2)

1 2 3

163

1S

ELF

TE

ST

=B

O01

BO

01

y =

2 t

o 5

SE

LFT

ES

T=

BO

0yB

O0y

xy=

11 to

16

SE

LFT

ES

T=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q02

0C

OM

_ER

R=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1C

OM

_ER

R=

BO

01B

O01

y =

2 t

o 5

CO

M_E

RR

=B

O0y

BO

0y

xy=

11 to

16

CO

M_E

RR

=B

Oxy

BO

xy

B06

Q01

0C

OL

OR

GR

EE

NC

olo

r g

reen

Bas

e co

lor

1C

OLO

R R

ED

Col

or r

ed

Q02

0C

OL

.CH

A.O

FFno

t co

nnec

ted

to B

I/B

O

1C

OL.

CH

A.B

X01

via

BI/

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5C

OL.

CH

A.B

Xxy

via

BI/

BO

xy

xy=

11 to

16

CO

L.C

HA

.BX

xyvi

a B

I/B

Oxy

Q03

0N

O F

LAS

HN

o fla

shin

g of

col

or

11

SE

CO

ND

Col

or c

hang

es e

ach

seco

nd

22

SE

CO

ND

S C

olor

cha

nges

eac

h 2

seco

nds

35

SE

CO

ND

S C

olor

cha

nges

eac

h 5

seco

nds

410

SE

CO

ND

S C

olor

cha

nges

eac

h 10

sec

onds

Sel

f-te

st

BINARY OUTPUTS

Err

or in

te

legr

am

com

mun

i-ca

tions

Cha

ngin

g co

lor

via

BI/

BO

Fla

shin

g co

lor

if co

lor

chan

ge is

ac

tive

DISPLAY

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRU


qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

B01

Q01

1D

EU

TS

CH

Ger

man

text

s

2E

NG

LIS

HE

nglis

h te

xts

Lang

uage

3F

RA

NC

AIS

Fre

nch

text

s

4.

. .

. . .

. .

. .

. .

.

B02

Q01

0L

OC

K P

AR

OFF

No

loc

king

1LO

CK

PA

R=

BI0

1Lo

ckin

g w

ith B

I01

2LO

CK

PA

R=

BI0

2Lo

ckin

g w

ith B

I02

xy=

11 to

16

LOC

K P

AR

=B

Ixy

Lock

ing

with

BIx

y

Q02

0L

OC

K O

P=

BIO

FFN

o l

ocki

ng o

f o

per

ato

r in

terv

enti

on

s

1LO

CK

OP

=B

I01

with

BI0

1

2LO

CK

OP

=B

I02

with

BI0

2

xy=

11 to

16

LOC

K O

P=

BIx

yw

ith B

Ixy

Q03

0N

O A

LM

:QU

ITN

o a

larm

ack

no

wle

dg

emen

t w

ith

bin

ary

inp

ut

1Q

UIT

ALM

=B

I01

with

BI0

1

2Q

UIT

ALM

=B

I02

with

BI0

2

xy=

11 to

16

QU

IT A

LM=

BIx

yw

ith B

Ixy

Q04

0L

ock

Men

u O

FF

No

lock

ing

of

the

men

u k

ey

1Lo

ckM

enu.

BI0

1w

ith B

I01

2Lo

ckM

enu.

BI0

2w

ith B

I02

xy=

11 to

16

Lock

Men

u.B

Ixy

with

BIx

y

B03

Q01

0FL

AG

1_B

X_O

FF

Fla

g 1

no

t co

nn

ecte

d

1F

LAG

1_B

X01

Fla

g 1

conn

ecte

d to

BI0

1 or

BO

01

y=2

to 5

FLA

G1_

BX

0yF

lag

1 co

nnec

ted

to B

I0y

or B

O05

xy=

11 to

16

FLA

G1_

BX

xyF

lag

1 co

nnec

ted

to B

Ixy

or B

Oxy

Q02

to

Q06

Co

nfi

gu

rati

on

fo

r fla

g 2

to

5,

iden

tic

to f

lag

1

INS

TR

UM

EN

T

I

NS

TR

UM

EN

T

IN

ST

RU

ME

NT

IN

STR

UM

EN

T

LANG-UAGE

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

Fla

g1

conn

ecte

d w

ith

bina

ry-

inpu

t/ou

tput

BINARY FLAGS

Lock

ing

of a

ll op

erat

or

inte

rven

tions

B02 BINARY INPUTS

Ala

rm

ackn

owle

dge-

men

t w

ith

bina

ry in

put

Lock

ing

of t

he

men

u ke

y

Lock

ing

of

para

met

er

defin

ition

s an

d co

nfi.

leve

ls

C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

N

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT

B04

Q01

1L

OC

AL

OP

ER

.L

oca

l op

erat

ion

of

un

it o

nly

2LO

C/R

EM

OP

.Lo

cal o

pera

tion

of u

nit

or v

ia p

ort.

Cha

ngeo

ver

in o

pera

tion

2

3R

EM

OT

E O

PE

R.

Loca

l ope

ratio

n vi

a po

rt o

nly

4LO

CA

L +

RE

MO

TE

Loca

l ope

ratio

n eq

ually

on

unit

or v

ia p

ort

B05

Q01

0S

EL

FTS

T=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

Loca

l/Rem

ote

REMOTE OPERATION

CONFIGURATION MENT INSTRUMENT

42/61-10010 ENP

02 E

nter

P

assw

ord

Inp

ut

PA

SS

WO

RD

_ _

_ _

_E

nte

r yo

ur

pas

swo

rd (

5 d

igit

s, c

han

ge

dig

it

wit

h t

he

INT

-key

). D

efau

lt:

0

B30

P01

Mod

bus

adre

ssx

= 1

to

127

M

OD

BU

S a

dre

ss 1

to

127

Dev

ice

adre

ss f

or

Mo

db

us

(00

= g

lob

al a

dre

ss ;

1=

def

ault

val

ue)

Q02

130

0 B

AU

DB

aud

rate

300

260

0 B

AU

DB

aud

rate

600

312

00 B

AU

DB

aud

rate

120

0

424

00 B

AU

DB

aud

rate

240

0

Bau

d ra

te5

4800

BA

UD

Bau

d ra

te 4

800

696

00 B

AU

DB

aud

rat

e 96

00

719

200

BA

UD

Bau

d ra

te 1

9200

838

400

BA

UD

Bau

d ra

te 3

8400

Q03

1R

ES

ER

VE

DR

eser

ve

Pro

toco

l2

MO

DB

US

RT

U M

od

bu

s R

TU

Q04

0N

ON

Eno

par

ity t

est

Par

ity2

EV

EN

even

B30 COMMUNICATIONP

CCONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIONINSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT


B10

Q01

0T

XT

/AL

AR

M-O

FF

Ala

rm t

exts

are

no

t d

isp

laye

d o

n f

ron

t p

anel

Ala

rm in

dica

tion

(on

the

disp

lay)

1T

XT

/ALA

RM

-ON

Ala

rm t

exts

are

dis

play

ed

Q02

0Q

UIT

_OF

FN

o a

ckn

ow

led

gem

ent

nec

essa

ry

1Q

UIT

_SIN

GLE

Onl

y th

e di

spla

yed

alar

m is

ack

now

ledg

ed

2Q

UIT

_ALL

All

alar

ms

are

ackn

owle

dged

B11

Q01

0B

12:M

AN

UA

LM

od

ule

s h

ave

to b

e en

tere

d m

anu

ally

(se

e In

stru

men

t-B

12)

USED MODULS

Mod

ule

assi

gnm

ent

1B

12:

AU

TO

MA

TIC

Uni

t st

arts

a s

can

proc

edur

e to

rec

ogni

se t

he

asse

mbl

ed m

odul

es (

Thi

s ta

kes

1 se

cond

, th

e yo

u w

ill s

ee a

gain

Q01

=0)

B12

Q01

0M

1=U

NU

SE

Dem

pty

2M

1=R

S48

5S

eria

l int

erfa

ce

4M

1=P

rofib

usD

PP

rofib

us m

odul

e

10M

1=A

I4-m

V4

x th

erm

ocou

ple

/ m

V

15M

1=A

I2-m

Am

A i

2 x

mA

with

gal

vani

c is

olat

ion

16M

1=A

I2-m

Am

V i

1 x

mA

+ 1

x t

herm

ocou

ple

with

gal

vani

c is

olat

ion

17M

1=A

I2-m

Vm

A i

1 x

ther

moc

oupl

e +

1 x

mA

with

gal

vani

c is

olat

ion

Slo

t 1

18M

1=A

I2-m

Vm

V i

2 x

ther

moc

oupl

e w

ith g

alva

nic

isol

atio

n

20M

1=A

I4-m

A p

4 x

mA

with

ele

ctro

nic

isol

atio

n

24M

1=A

I4-f

/tF

requ

ency

or

time

mea

sure

men

t

30M

1=A

I4-P

t-2L

4 x

Pt1

00 2

-wire

circ

uit

35M

1=A

I4-P

t-3/

42

x P

t100

3/4

-wire

circ

uit

40M

1=A

O3-

VO

utpu

t 3

x V

50M

1=A

O3-

mA

Out

put

3 x

20 m

A

60M

1=B

IO6-

BIN

6-fo

ld b

inar

y in

put/

outp

ut

70M

1=B

O4-

RE

LAIS

Out

put

4 x

rela

ys

Ala

rm a

ckno

w-

ledg

emen

t

ALARM HANDLING

SET MODULE TYPE

INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION

B20

Q01

0P

AS

SW

OR

D_O

FF

Pas

swo

rd p

rote

ctio

n i

s n

ot

acti

ve

1P

AS

SW

OR

D_O

NP

assw

ord

prot

ectio

n is

act

ivat

ed

2P

AS

SW

OR

D_T

IME

Pas

swor

d pr

otec

tion

is a

ctiv

e, b

ut w

ill b

e in

activ

ed

for

30 s

aft

er r

etur

ning

to

the

oper

atin

g di

spla

y

Pas

swor

d pr

otec

tion

ASSWORD

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s1.menu2.menu

165

) )

3A

Ixy-

SQ

R2

Squ

are

root

ing

(line

ar b

elow

PV

O)

4A

Ixy-

TY

PE

LT

yp L

(-2

00 .

. .

1000

°C)

5A

Ixy-

TY

PE

JT

yp J

(-2

00 .

. .

1200

°C)

6A

Ixy-

TY

PE

KT

yp K

(-2

00 .

. .

1400

°C)

7A

Ixy-

TY

PE

UT

yp U

(-2

00 .

. .

600°

C)

8A

Ixy-

TY

PE

RT

yp R

( 0

. .

.17

00°C

)

9A

Ixy-

TY

PE

ST

yp S

( 0

. .

.18

00°C

)

10A

Ixy-

TY

PE

TT

yp T

(-2

00 .

. .

400°

C)

Line

aris

atio

n11

AIx

y-T

YP

E B

Typ

B (

0 .

. .

1800

°C)

12A

Ixy-

TY

PE

DT

yp D

( 0

. .

.23

00°C

)

13A

Ixy-

TY

PE

ET

yp E

( -

200

. .

.100

0°C

)

14A

Ixy-

RT

D-2

00P

t 10

0 -

200

. .

.200

°C

15A

Ixy-

RT

D-4

50P

t 10

0 0

. .

.45

0°C

16A

Ixy-

RT

D-8

00P

t 10

0 -2

00 .

. .

800°

C

17A

Ixy-

TA

B1

Tab

le 1

18A

Ixy-

TA

B2

Tab

le 2

19A

Ixy-

TA

B3

Tab

le 3

20A

Ixy-

TA

B4

Tab

le 4

Bxy AI-DEFINITION

AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITIONCONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION


Q05

0T

IME

OU

T=

OF

Fw

ithou

t m

onito

ring

11

SE

CO

ND

Tim

eou

t: 1

s

2 to

24

2 to

24

SE

CO

ND

ST

imeo

ut:

2 to

24

s

2525

SE

CO

ND

ST

imeo

ut:

25 s

P06

Pro

fibus

ad

ress

1 to

125

DP

-Sla

ve-A

dd

r 1

to 1

25P

RO

FIB

US

dev

ice

adre

ss

(1

=fa

cto

ry s

etti

ng

)

Q07

0C

FG

_I_N

ON

EN

o i

np

ut

dat

a

1C

FG

_I_1

WO

RD

Leng

th o

f in

put

data

: 1

wor

d

2C

FG

_I_2

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

inpu

t da

ta:

2 w

ords

3C

FG

_I_4

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

inpu

t da

ta:

4 w

ords

4C

FG

_I_8

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

inpu

t da

ta:

8 w

ords

5C

FG

_I_1

6WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

inpu

t da

ta:

16 w

ords

Q08

0C

FG

_0_N

ON

EN

o o

utp

ut

dat

a1

CF

G_0

_1W

OR

DLe

ngth

of

outp

ut d

ata:

1 w

ord

2C

FG

_0_2

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

outp

ut d

ata:

2 w

ords

3C

FG

_0_4

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

outp

ut d

ata:

4 w

ords

4C

FG

_0_8

WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

outp

ut d

ata:

8 w

ords

5C

FG

_A_1

6WO

RD

SLe

ngth

of

outp

ut d

ata:

16

wor

ds

1M

OD

BU

S T

imeo

ut

Mo

db

us

(Tim

e s.

Q05

)

2P

RO

FIB

US

Tim

eout

Pro

fibus

(T

ime

s. Q

05)

3M

OD

+ P

RO

FIB

US

Tim

eout

Mod

bus

and

Pro

fibus

Def

ault

DP

co

nfig

urat

ion

Inpu

t da

ta

Q09

Tim

eou

t fo

r M

odbu

s/

Pro

fibus

B30 COMMUNICATION

Def

ault

DP

co

nfig

urat

ion

Out

put

data

Tim

eout

for

m

issi

ng

tele

gram

s on

bu

s

TION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

Bxy

(B

01

to B

14)

Q01

0U

NU

SE

DIn

put

unus

ed (

fact

ory

set

tin

g f

or

AI0

2, A

I11

to

AI1

4).

AI0

1can

not

be d

isab

led.

1A

Ixy

0 .

. 20

mA

0 .

. 20

mA

2A

Ixy

4 .

. 20

mA

4 .

. 20

mA

(d

efau

lt f

or

AI0

1)

3A

Ixy

TC

The

rmoc

oupl

e

4A

Ixy

RT

D-2

WP

t100

as

2-w

ire c

ircui

t

5A

Ixy

RT

D-3

WP

t100

as

3-w

ire c

ircui

t

6A

Ixy

RT

D-4

WP

t100

as

4-w

ire c

ircui

t (n

ot f

or A

I01)

Sig

nal r

ange

7A

Ixy

PO

T.1

50T

elet

rans

mitt

er n

omin

al 1

50 O

hm (

75 t

o 20

0 O

hm

8A

Ixy

PO

T.1

500

Tel

etra

nsm

itter

, no

m.

1500

Ohm

(0,

75 t

o 2

kOhm

9 (x

y>10

)A

Ixy

Per

iod

Tim

e m

easu

rem

ent

10 (

xy>

10)

Aix

y F

RE

Q 1

0 k

Fre

quen

cy m

easu

rem

ent

up t

o 10

kH

z

11 (

xy>

10)

AIx

y F

RE

Q 2

0 k

Fre

quen

cy m

easu

rem

ent

up t

o 20

kH

z

12 (

xy>

10)

Pul

seP

ulse

cou

nter

13 (

xy>

10)

Incr

emnt

Incr

em.

tran

sm.

and

dire

ct.

of r

otat

. (2

inpu

ts)

14 (

xy>

10)

Incr

em.0

Incr

em.

tran

sm.

with

zer

o tr

ansm

. (3

inpu

ts)

Q02

1A

Ixy-

LIN

EA

Rli

nea

r

2A

Ixy-

SQ

R1

Squ

are

root

ing

(sw

itch-

off

belo

w P

VO

)

AI-

DE

FIN

ITIO

N

A

I-D

EF

INIT

ION

AI-

DE

FIN

ITIO

N

Bxy AI-DEFINITION

AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIO

42/61-10010 EN

(squ

are

root

)In

pu

tA

Ixy-

SQ

RF

acto

ry s

etti

ng

0.0

P0

9 T

-Filt

er

time

cons

tan

tIn

pu

tA

Ixy-

FIL

TE

RT

.R

ang

e:

0 to

12

0 s

; R

eso

luti

on

: 1

s

Fac

tory

se

ttin

g 0

s (

0.00

.00

h)

1A

Ixy

-FA

IL.V

AL

Def

ault

val

ue

2A

Ixy

-OLD

VA

L.H

old

las

t m

eas

ured

val

ue

P1

1 D

ef.

valu

eIn

pu

tA

Ixy

-FA

IL V

AL

Ran

ge:

0 t

o 1

02%

; R

eso

luti

on

0.0

001

Fac

tory

set

tin

g 1

02%

Q1

2 0

AIx

y-E

RR

=N

.BO

No

me

ssag

e

1A

Ixy-

ER

R=

BO

01B

O01

mn

=2

to 5

AIx

y-E

RR

=B

Om

nB

Om

n

mn

=11

to

16

AIx

y-E

RR

=B

Om

nB

Om

n

Q13

0A

Ixy=

N.F

LN

o e

rro

rs t

o f

lag

1A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

1vi

a F

lag

1

2A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

2vi

a F

lag

2

3A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

3vi

a F

lag

3

4A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

4vi

a F

lag

4

5A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

5vi

a F

lag

5

6A

IxyE

RR

=F

LG0

6vi

a F

lag

6

Bxy AE-DEFINITION

Q1

0 D

efau

lt va

lue

stra

tegy

fo

r s

enso

r fa

ult

Err

or m

essa

ge

via

Fla

g

Err

or m

essa

ge

via

BO

mn

CCONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGUAI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION


qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

Q03

0A

Ixy-

NO

DIM

no

dim

ensi

on

1A

Ixy

DIM

US

ER

4-di

gits

, us

er-d

efin

ed

2A

Ixy

DIM

%%

3A

Ixy

DIM

°C

°C

4A

Ixy

DIM

°F

°F a

utom

atic

ran

ge

switc

h-ov

er

5A

Ixy

DIM

mb

arm

bar

Dim

ensi

on

for

6A

Ixy

DIM

bar

bar

AIx

y7

AIx

y D

IM m

3/h

m3/

h

8A

Ixy

DIM

kg

/hkg

/h

9A

Ixy

DIM

t/h

t/h

10A

Ixy

DIM

l/h

l/h

11A

Ixy

DIM

hl/

hhl

/h

12A

Ixy

DIM

pH

pH

13A

Ixy

DIM

mm

mm

14A

Ixy

DIM

mm

15A

Ixy

DIM

m/h

m/h

16A

Ixy

DIM

mV

mV

17A

Iy D

IM V

V

18A

Ixy

DIM

mA

mA

19A

Ixy

DIM

AA

20A

Ixy

DIM

ss

21A

Ixy

DIM

Hz

Hz

22A

Ixy

DIM

kH

zkH

z

P04

Ent

er s

elf

def.

dim

ensi

on

Inp

ut

AIx

y-U

SE

R D

IM _

_ _

_E

dit

dim

ensi

on

in

th

e d

isp

lay

(if

Q0

3=1)

P05

Sta

rt o

f sc

alin

gIn

pu

tA

Ixy-

SC

AL

.LO

Ran

ge:

-99

99 t

o 9

9999

; R

eso

luti

on

: 1

F

acto

ry s

etti

ng

0%

of

me

asu

rin

g r

ang

eP

06 E

nd o

f sc

alin

gIn

pu

tA

Ixy-

SC

AL

.HI

Ran

ge:

-99

99 t

o 9

9999

; R

eso

luti

on

: 1

F

acto

ry s

etti

ng

: 10

0%

of

mea

suri

ng

ran

ge

Q07

0A

Ixy

NO

NE

no r

efer

enc

e ju

nctio

n

1A

Ixy

TR

EF

IN

Tin

tern

al

2A

Ixy

TR

EF

0C

exte

rnal

0 °

C

3A

Ixy

TR

EF

20C

exte

rna

l 20

°C

4A

Ixy

TR

EF

50C

exte

rna

l 50

°C

5A

Ixy

TR

EF

60C

exte

rna

l 60

°C

P08

Val

ue P

VO

R

ang

e: -

9999

to

+99

999

, R

eso

luti

on

0.0

1

Bxy AI-DEFINITION

Ref

eren

ce

junc

tion

com

pens

atio

n

Bxy AE-DEFINITION

RATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION

167

3B

Oxy

EN

GIS

ED

"log

ical

0"

- no

cur

rent

; "l

ogic

al 1

"

4B

Oxy

DE

NG

ISE

D"l

ogic

al 0

" -

curr

ent;

"lo

gica

l 1"

- no

cur

rent

B01

Q01

1S

ING

LE

LO

OP

Sin

gle-

chan

nel c

ontr

olle

r

8M

AN

UA

LST

AT

ION

Sin

gle-

chan

nel m

anua

l sta

tion

Con

trol

fun

ctio

n9

SE

TP

T.S

TA

TIO

NS

ingl

e-ch

anne

l set

poin

t st

atio

n

10R

AT

IO.S

TA

TIO

NS

ingl

e-ch

anne

l rat

io s

tatio

n

11P

OS

ITIO

NE

RS

ingl

e-ch

anne

l pos

ition

er

13A

LAR

M S

TA

TIO

NS

ingl

e-ch

anne

l ala

rm s

tatio

n

Q02

1C

ON

TIN

OU

Sco

nti

nu

ou

s

2S

TE

P C

ON

TR

. m

otor

ised

val

ve c

ontr

ol (

step

con

trol

)

Con

trol

ler

outp

ut3

ON

/OF

F C

ON

TR

.O

n/O

ff (

time

prop

ortio

ning

)

5H

-OF

F-C

(S

+S

)he

at-o

ff-c

ool (

2 bi

nary

out

puts

)

6H

-OF

F-C

(C

+S

)he

at(c

ontin

ous)

-off

-coo

l(bin

ary)

7S

PLI

T.R

.(C

+C

)sp

lit r

ange

with

2 c

ontin

uous

out

puts

BIODEFIN

TION

LO

OP

1

LO

OP

1

LO

OP

1

B01 CONTROL-FCT.

BIO-DE LOOP1 LOOP1 CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CO


Q15

1A

Ixy

NA

MU

R+

Pic

k-u

p a

cc.t

o N

AM

UR

DIN

192

32 p

osi

tive

ed

ge

2A

Ixy

NA

MU

R -

Pic

k-up

acc

.to

NA

MU

R D

IN 1

9232

neg

ativ

e ed

ge

3A

Ixy

NA

MU

R +

/-P

ick-

up a

cc.t

o N

AM

UR

DIN

192

32 b

oth

edge

s

4A

Ixy

24 V

PO

SB

inar

y si

gnal

0/2

4 V

pos

itive

edg

e

5A

Ixy

24 V

NE

GB

inar

y si

gnal

0/2

4 V

neg

ativ

e ed

ge

6A

Ixy

24 V

+/-

Bin

ary

sign

al 0

/24

V b

oth

edge

s

7A

Ixy

TT

L P

OS

TT

L si

gnal

0/5

V p

ositi

ve e

dge

8A

Ixy

TT

L N

EG

TT

L si

gnal

0/5

V n

egat

ive

edge

9A

Ixy

TT

L +

/-T

TL

sign

al 0

/5V

bot

h ed

ges

Bxy

(B

01Q

010

UN

US

ED

un

used

(no

t fo

r A

O01

)

to B

13)

1A

Oxy

0 .

. 2

0mA

0 .

. 2

0mA

Sig

nal r

ange

ou

tput

AO

xy2

AO

xy 4

. .

20m

A 4

. .

20m

A

4A

Oxy

10

mA

10 m

A c

onst

ant

curr

ent

(onl

y at

cur

rent

mod

ule)

5A

Oxy

20

mA

20 m

A c

onst

ant

curr

ent

(onl

y at

cur

rent

mod

ule)

0A

AO

xy L

D=

N.B

ON

o o

utp

ut

mn

=1

to 5

AO

xy L

D.=

BO

mn

BO

mn

mn

=11

to

16

AO

xy L

D.=

BO

mn

BO

mn

Q03

0A

Oxy

LD

=N

.FL

No

err

ors

to

fla

g

1A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG01

via

Fla

g 1

2A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG02

via

Fla

g 2

3A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG03

via

Fla

g 3

4A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG04

via

Fla

g 4

5A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG05

via

Fla

g 5

6A

Oxy

LD

=F

LG06

via

Fla

g 6

Q02

Out

put

of

impe

danc

e m

onito

ring

via

BO

AO

-DE

FIN

ITIO

N

AO

-DE

FIN

ITIO

N

AO

-DE

FIN

ITIO

N

AO

-DE

FIN

ITIO

N

Err

or m

essa

ge

via

Fla

g

Sig

nal-

and

trig

ger

adju

stem

ent

(onl

y fo

r fr

eque

ncy

mod

ule)

Bxy AE-DEFINITIONBxy AO-

DEFINITION

AO-DEFINITION AO-DEFINITION AI-DEFINITION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIONI

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s1.menu2.menu

Bxy

(B

01Q

010

BIO

xy=

UN

US

ED

Unu

sed

(def

ault

fo

r m

od

ule

, xy

>10

)

to B

16)

1B

Ixy

DIR

EC

T24

V -

"lo

gic

al 1

"; 0

V -

"lo

gic

al 0

"

BIO

Def

initi

on2

BIx

y IN

VE

RS

24V

- "

logi

cal 0

"; 0

V -

"lo

gica

l 1"

I-B

IO-D

EF

INIT

ION

B

IO-D

EF

INIT

ION

BIO

-DE

FIN

ITIO

N

FINITIONNFIGURATION

42/61-10010 ENP

ID C

ON

TR

OL

Pro

port

iona

l-Int

egra

l-Diff

eren

tial a

lgor

ithm

1D

IFF

. P

Vco

ntr

oll

ed v

aria

ble

2D

IFF

. E

RR

OR

Con

trol

ler

devi

atio

n

Q05

1D

IFF

.BIP

OL

AR

bip

ola

r

Diff

eren

tiatio

n2

DIF

F.P

OS

ITIV

only

pos

itive

cha

nges

3D

IFF

.NE

GA

TIV

only

neg

ativ

e ch

ange

s

Q06

0N

O S

TA

RT

UP

inac

tiv

Q07

0G

CO

NS

T.

off

1G

LIN

. P

Vlin

ear

from

PV

2G

LIN

. S

Plin

ear

from

SP

3G

LIN

. O

UT

linea

r fr

om O

ut4

G L

IN.

ER

Rlin

ear

from

Err

G (

Gai

n) c

ontr

ol5

G L

IN.

|ER

R|

linea

r fr

om |E

rr|

7G

TA

Bm

PV

via

tabl

e m

of

PV

8G

TA

Bm

SP

via

Tab

le m

of

W9

G T

AB

m O

UT

via

Tab

le m

of

Y

10G

TA

Bm

ER

Rvi

a T

able

m o

f X

w

11G

TR

AN

S.A

LM4

G s

witc

hing

by

AL4

(se

e LO

OP

1-B

08-Q

04 a

nd

PA

RA

ME

TE

R-L

OO

P1-

94)

12G

TR

AN

S=

BIx

G s

witc

hing

by

BIx

(se

e Q

08)

13G

CO

NT

R=

AIx

G-li

near

fro

m A

Ix (

see

Q09

)

B02 CONTR.PARAM

Q03

Diff

eren

tial

shar

e co

nnec

ted

with

B02 CONTR.PA

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1


Q03

1M

: CH

AR

.-DIR

.

Man

ual

char

acte

ristic

2M

: C

HA

R.-

INV

.

(not

val

id f

or

posi

tione

r an

d st

ep c

ontr

olle

r)3

M:

INV

.-D

IR.

4M

: D

IR.-

DIR

5M

: IN

V.-

INV

.

6M

: D

IR.-

INV

.

0N

O P

OS

.FB

AC

KN

O p

osi

tion

-feed

bac

k si

gna

l1

PO

S.F

BC

K=

AI0

1A

I01

2P

OS

.FB

CK

=A

I02

AI0

2

n=11

to 1

3P

OS

.FB

CK

=A

InA

In

0S

EL

FTU

NE

OF

FO

ff1

Sel

ftun

e O

nO

n

Q04

po

sitio

n-fe

edba

ck s

igna

l an

d di

spla

y

The

out

put

valu

es O

UT

1 or

(O

UT

1 an

d O

UT

2) in

rel

atio

n to

the

out

put

valu

e O

UT

of

the

PID

-alg

orith

m (

at a

nalo

g ba

r) .

The

val

ues

OU

T1

or O

UT

2 ar

e fo

r co

ntin

ous

outp

uts

dire

ctly

und

erst

anda

ble.

If

ther

e ar

e bi

nary

out

puts

the

val

ues

will

be

repr

esen

ted

by t

he k

eyin

g ra

tio T

on/T

cycl

of

the

outp

ut.

Q05

Sel

f-tu

ning

B01 CONTROL-FUNCTION

URATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION

100% 0%

0%50

%10

0%OU

T

OU

T 1

OU

T2

100% 0%

0%50

%10

0%

OU

TO

UT

1O

UT

2

100% 0%

0%50

%

OU

TO

UT

1O

UT

2

100%

OU

T1

100% 0%

OU

T

0%50

%10

0%

100% 0%

0%50

%10

0%

OU

T

OU

T1

100% 0%

0%50

%10

0%

OU

T

OU

T1

OU

T2

cont

-in

ous

+

On/

Off

co

ntro

l-le

r

Spl

it ra

nge

+

H

-Off

-Cco

ntro

ller

P1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

B02

1A

:CH

AR

.-D

IR.

Aut

omat

ic "

dire

ct"

actio

n ch

arac

teris

tic

2A

:CH

AR

.-IN

V.

Au

tom

atic

"in

vers

e" a

ctio

n c

har

acte

rist

ic

Q02

1P

CO

NT

RO

LP

ropo

rtio

nal a

lgor

ithm

2P

I C

ON

TR

OL

Pro

po

rtio

nal

-In

teg

ral

alg

ori

thm

3P

D C

ON

TR

OL

Pro

port

iona

l-Diff

eren

tial a

lgor

ithm

4

Q01

Aut

omat

ic

char

acte

ristic

Con

trol

-al

gorit

hm

RAM.

CONFIGU LOOP1

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

169

10E

XT

R.S

P.

MA

XE

xtre

me

valu

e S

P:

Err

= I

C1

- M

ax (

SP

1,IC

2,IC

3)11

EX

TR

.SP

. M

INE

xtre

me

valu

e S

P:

Err

= I

C1

- M

in (

SP

1,IC

2,IC

3)

Q02

13

CO

MP

ON

EN

T01

PV

-SP

P

Vh

PV

SP

23

CO

MP

ON

EN

T02

PV

+P

Vh-

SP

P

V

P

V+

PV

h

SP

33

CO

MP

ON

EN

T03

PV

+P

Vh-

SP

P

Vh

PV

SP

43

CO

MP

ON

EN

T04

PV

+P

Vh-

SP

P

Vh

PV

+P

Vh

SP

53

CO

MP

ON

EN

T05

PV

+P

Vh-

SP

P

V+

PV

h

PV

+P

Vh

SP

63

CO

MP

ON

EN

T06

PV

+P

Vh-

SP

P

Vh

PV

SP

7

3 C

OM

PO

NE

NT

07P

V+

PV

h-S

P

PV

+P

Vh

PV

S

P8

3 C

OM

PO

NE

NT

08P

V-(

SP

+P

Vh)

PV

PV

SP

93

CO

MP

ON

EN

T09

PV

-(S

P+

PV

h)

P

V

P

V

S

P+

PV

h

D:

D (

Diff

eren

tial)-

shar

e co

nnec

ted

to

PV

an,

PV

di:

Ana

log-

+ D

igita

l dis

play

for

PV

S

Pan

: A

nalo

g di

spla

y fo

r S

P

B03 INPUT CIRCUIT

Mul

ti co

mpo

nent

st

ruct

ure

Mul

ti co

mpo

nent

str

uctu

re (

subm

enu

of Q

01-2

)P

Vh=

Con

st2*

(IC2+

Con

st3*

IC3)

; P

V=

Con

st1*

IC1

ER

R =

D

P

Van

,PV

di

SP

an

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION COLOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOO


qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

Q08

0G

TR

AN

S=

OF

FN

o G

-Ch

ang

eove

r1

G T

RA

NS

=B

I01

Cha

ngeo

ver

with

BI0

12

G T

RA

NS

=B

I02

Cha

ngeo

ver

with

BI0

2xy

=11

to

16

G T

RA

NS

=B

Ixy

Cha

ngeo

ver

with

BIx

y

Q09

0G

AIx

=O

FF

No

G c

on

tro

l b

y A

Ix1

G C

ON

TR

=A

I01

cont

rolle

d by

AI0

12

G C

ON

TR

=A

I02

cont

rolle

d by

AI0

2xy

=11

to

14

G C

ON

TR

=A

Ixy

cont

rolle

d by

AIx

y

Q10

to

Q12

Q13

to

Q15

Q16

to

Q18

Q28

0F

F:A

DD

=O

FF

No

dis

turb

ance

var

iab

le f

eed

forw

ard

to

Ou

t1

FF

:AD

D=

AI0

1A

I01

adds

to

Out

2 F

F:A

DD

=A

I02

AI0

2 ad

ds t

o O

utxy

=11

to

14

FF

:AD

D=

AIx

yA

Ixy

adds

to

Out

91F

F:A

DD

=S

C1

Out

put

stat

e co

rrec

tion

1 ad

ds t

o O

ut

Q29

1F

F:L

INE

AR

lin

ear

2F

F:D

IF.B

IPO

Ldi

ffer

ent.

bip

olar

3F

F:D

IF.P

OS

IT.

diff

eren

t. u

nipo

lar

posi

tive

chan

ges

4F

F:D

IF.N

EG

AT

.di

ffer

ent.

uni

pola

r ne

gativ

e ch

ange

s

B03

Q01

0N

o IN

PU

T C

IRC

With

out

inpu

t si

gnal

con

nect

ion

(sta

tions

)

1O

NE

PV

Fix

ed v

alu

e E

rr =

IC

1-S

P

23

CO

MP

ON

EN

TM

ultic

ompo

nent

s (s

ee s

ubm

enu

Q02

)

E

rr =

fun

ctio

n (I

C1,

IC

2, I

C3)

3M

ULT

IPLI

CA

TE

Mul

tiplic

atio

n

Err

= I

C1

x (

IC2

+ C

onst

3 x

IC3

) -

SP

4R

AT

IO1

(A/B

)ra

tio1

Err

= I

C1

- (

R x

( I

C2

+ C

onst

3 x

IC3

) +

Bia

s +

IC

4 )

5F

IX/R

AT

IO1

Fix

ed v

alue

/rat

io1

switc

habl

e (1

<->

4)

6R

AT

IO2

(A/(

A+

B))

ratio

2

E

rr =

IC

1 -

[(R

/ (

1 -

R))

x (

IC2

+ C

onst

3 x

IC3)

+ B

ias

+ I

C4]

7F

IX/R

AT

IO2

Fix

ed v

alue

/rat

io2

switc

habl

e (1

<->

6)

8E

XT

R.P

V.

MA

XE

xtre

me

valu

e P

V:

Err

= M

ax (

IC1,

....

.IC

3) -

SP

9E

XT

R.P

V M

INE

xtre

me

valu

e P

V:

Err

= M

in (

IC1,

....

.IC

3) -

SP

MR

(m

anua

l res

et)

cont

rol (

like

G,

see

Q7

to Q

9)

B03 INPUT CIRCUIT

Dis

turb

ance

V

aria

ble

Out

+Z

Td

(der

ivat

ive

time)

con

trol

( li

ke G

, se

e Q

7 to

Q9)

G-c

ontr

ol.A

Ix

Tr

(res

et t

ime)

con

trol

(lik

e G

, se

e Q

7 to

Q9)

)

G (

Gai

n)

chan

geov

er

Inpu

t ci

rcui

t (p

aram

eter

s C

onst

1,

Con

st2,

C

onst

3, C

onst

4 an

d B

IAS

see

: P

AR

AM

ET

ER

/ LO

OP

1/10

1 to

10

4 an

d 11

7)

B02 CONTR.PARAM.

Dis

turb

ance

va

riabl

e ad

ds t

o O

ut

NFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIONP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

42/61-10010 EN

P14

Sca

ling-

fact

or R

atio

Inp

ut

Rat

io F

acto

r

Fac

tory

set

tin

g:

SP

= 1

00.0

R

ange

-99

99 t

o 99

999

1A

NA

LO

G P

V,S

PP

V1

and

R x

PV

22

AN

ALO

G R

AT

IOR

act

and

Rse

t

P16

Val

ue

Dis

play

for

0%

Inp

ut

AN

AL

OG

0%

Ana

log.

0% s

. B

03-Q

15

valu

e of

ana

log

disp

lay

for

0%

F

acto

ry s

eetin

g 0.

0 R

ange

-99

99 t

o 99

999

P17

Val

ue

disp

lay

for

100%

Inp

ut

AN

AL

OG

.100

%A

nalo

g.10

0% s

. B

03-Q

15

va

lue

of a

nalo

g di

spla

y fo

r 10

0%

Fac

tory

see

ting

100.

0 R

ange

-99

99 t

o 99

999

0P

V,R

=N

O A

ON

ot

rou

ted

to

ou

tpu

t

1P

V,R

=A

O01

Ana

log

outp

ut A

O01

xy=

11 t

o 1

3P

V,R

=A

Oxy

Ana

log

outp

ut A

Oxy

B04

Q01

0IC

1=0%

IC1

= f

ixed

val

ue 0

%

1IC

1=A

I01

IC1

con

nec

ted

to

AI0

1

2IC

1=A

I02

IC1

conn

ecte

d to

AI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

4IC

1=A

Ixy

IC1

conn

ecte

d to

AIx

y

91IC

1=S

C_1

Out

put

of t

he s

tate

cor

rect

ion

1

94IC

1=T

AB

4O

utpu

t of

Tab

le 4

100

IC1=

100%

Fix

ed v

alue

100

%

Q18

PV

ret

rans

-m

issi

on c

urre

nt

cont

rol v

aria

ble

or R

act

to

B03 INPUT CIRCUIT

Q15

Ana

log

disp

lay

for

ratio

Rou

ting_

IC1.

IC1

of in

put

circ

uit

conn

ecte

d w

ith:

B04 ROUTING_IC-AI

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGLOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1


1IN

D.E

RR

:%in

per

cen

t (1

00%

= m

easu

rin

g r

ang

e o

f IC

1)

2IN

D.E

RR

:EU

in E

U

Q04

0P

,S N

O D

IMW

ith

ou

t d

imen

sio

n1

P,S

US

ER

DIM

4-di

git

dim

ensi

on,

defin

able

2P

,S D

IM %

%

3P

,S D

IM °

C°C

. .

. .

P,S

DIM

. .

. .

see

AI

defin

ition

Q03

22P

,S D

IM k

Hz

kHz

P05

Edi

t th

e us

er d

imen

sion

Inp

ut

Lm

-US

ER

-DIM

. _

_ _

_E

dit

ing

of

the

4 d

igit

Use

r D

imen

sio

n i

n L

oo

p 1

(on

ly i

f Q

04=

1)Q

060

P,S

100

00.

0 de

cim

al p

lace

s

1P

,S 1

000.

01

deci

mal

pla

ces

2P

,S 1

00.0

02

dec

imal

pla

ces

3P

,S 1

0.00

03

deci

mal

pla

ces

4P

,S 1

.000

04

deci

mal

pla

ces

5P

,S F

LOA

T.P

T.

Dis

play

of

float

ing

deci

mal

poi

nt

P

07 S

tart

sc

alin

g fo

r P

V,S

PIn

pu

tD

IG.I

ND

.LO

.S

tart

of

the

scal

e of

PV

and

SP

.

F

acto

ry s

etti

ng

: S

P =

0,0

R

ange

: -9

999

to 9

9999

P08

End

sc

alin

g fo

r P

V,S

PIn

pu

tD

IG.I

ND

.HI.

End

of

the

scal

e of

PV

and

SP

.

Fac

tory

set

tin

g:

SP

= 1

00,0

Ran

ge:

-999

9 to

999

99

1R

AT

IO I

S/S

PR

act

and

Rse

t

2E

S1,

RA

TIO

*ES

2IC

1 an

d R

x I

C2

0R

NO

DIM

wit

ho

ut

dim

ensi

on

(e.

g.

rati

o)

1R

US

ER

DIM

4-di

git

dim

ensi

on f

reel

y de

finab

le

2R

DIM

%%

(F

acto

ry s

etti

ng

fo

r ra

tio

2)

P11

Edi

t th

e us

er d

imen

sion

fo

r ra

tioIn

pu

tR

-US

ER

-DIM

. _

_ _

_E

dit

ing

of

the

4 d

igit

Use

r D

imen

sio

n i

n L

oo

p

m (

on

ly i

f Q

10=

1)

Q12

0R

100

00.

0 de

cim

al p

lace

s

1R

100

0.0

1 de

cim

al p

lace

s

2R

100

.00

2 d

ecim

al p

lace

s3

R 1

0.00

03

deci

mal

pla

ces

4R

1.0

000

4 de

cim

al p

lace

s

5R

FLO

AT

.PT

.D

ispl

ay o

f flo

atin

g de

cim

al p

oint

P13

Sca

ling-

offs

et R

atio

Inp

ut

Rat

io O

ffse

tO

ffse

t ra

tio d

ispl

ay;

Fac

tory

set

tin

g:

SP

= 0

.0;

Ran

ge:

-999

9 bi

s 99

999

Dig

ital s

calin

g of

rat

io d

ispl

ay f

or r

atio

R=

1

Q09

Dig

ital

disp

lay

of r

atio

B03 INPUT CIRCUIT B03 INPUT CIRCUIT

Dec

imal

pla

ces

for

PV

,SP

Q10

Dim

ensi

on

for

ratio

(al

so

for

ratio

and

m

ultip

licat

ion)

Q03

Dis

play

of

the

cont

rol

devi

atio

n

Dim

ensi

on f

or

cont

rol v

aria

ble

and

setp

oint

(n

ot r

atio

and

m

ultip

licat

ion)

Dec

imal

pla

ces

for

Rat

io-

disp

lay

URATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

1710

SP

.PR

GR

M=

OF

Fo

ff

1S

P.P

RG

RM

=O

Non

1S

P.I

ND

=T

AR

GT

Dis

pla

y o

f th

e ta

rget

ed s

etp

oin

t

2S

P.I

ND

=R

AM

PD

ispl

ay o

f th

e fa

lsifi

ed v

alue

.The

tar

gete

d se

tpoi

nt

is d

ispl

ayed

dur

ing

SP

adj

ustm

ent,

3 s

afte

r th

e la

st a

ctua

ting

key

of t

he c

urre

nt s

etpo

int.

Q10

0

SP

.AC

T=

NO

AO

Set

po

int

no

t o

n o

utp

ut

1S

P.A

CT

=A

O01

Ana

log

outp

ut A

O01

2S

P.A

CT

=A

O02

Ana

log

outp

ut A

O02

xy=

11 t

o 1

3S

P.A

CT

=A

Oxy

Ana

log

outp

ut A

Oxy

Q08

P

rogr

amm

er

setp

oint

Q09

D

ispl

ay o

f se

tpoi

nt

fals

ified

te

mpo

raril

ly b

y ra

mp

Cur

rent

set

poin

t to

AO

x

B05 SETPOINTS

LOOP1 LOO CONFIGURATION CONFIGU

Q11

0

SP

.TR

AN

S=

OF

Fo

ff

1S

P1-

SP

2 B

Ix

2S

P1-

SP

4 B

Iy

Set

poin

t ch

ange

over

BIx

B

Iy

S

etpo

int

0

0

SP

1

1

0

SP

2

0

1

SP

3

1

1

SP

4

D

efin

ition

BIx

, B

Iy s

ee B

09-Q

13 ,

Q14

LOOP1 LOOP1 CONFIGURATION


qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

de

scri

pti

on

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

Q02

R

outin

g_IC

2Q

03

Rou

ting_

IC3

Q04

R

outin

g_IC

4

Q05

0T

AB

4=N

O A

IN

ot

ind

ivid

ual

ly u

sed

1T

AB

4=A

I01

AI0

1

2T

AB

4=A

I02

AI0

2

xy=

11 t

o14

TA

B4=

AIx

yA

Ixy

Q06

Rou

ting_

B1

0B

1=N

O B

IB

1 u

nu

sed

1B

1=B

I01

BI0

1

2B

1=B

I02

BI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

6B

1=B

Ixy

BIx

y

B05

Q01

0S

P1.

INT

=O

FF

off

Set

poin

t 1

of

cont

rolle

r 1

1S

P1.

INT

=O

Nca

n o

nly

be

chan

ged

per

key

s o

r in

terf

ace

2S

P1.

INT

=T

RA

CK

follo

ws

curr

ent

setp

oint

0S

P1=

NO

PA

RA

Mn

o

1S

P1=

PA

RA

Mye

s is

not

tra

cked

Q03

0S

P2.

INT

=O

FF

off

1S

P2.

INT

=O

NO

nly

chan

geab

le p

er k

ey o

r in

terf

ace

2S

P2=

PA

RA

M.F

LXO

nly

oper

atab

le a

t pa

rale

vel D

elta

onl

y

3S

P2=

DE

LTA

.PA

Rop

erat

able

at

para

leve

l

4S

P2=

RA

TIO

.TR

KS

R1

follo

ws

actu

al r

atio

Q04

0S

P3.

INT

=O

FF

off

1S

P3.

INT

=O

NO

nly

chan

geab

le p

er k

ey o

r in

terf

ace

2S

P3=

PA

RA

M.F

LXO

nly

to b

e op

erat

ed a

t pa

ram

eter

men

u

3S

P3=

DE

LTA

.PA

Rde

lta o

nly

to b

e op

erat

ed a

t pa

ram

eter

men

u

4S

P3=

RA

TIO

.TR

KS

R2

trac

ks t

he a

ctua

l Rat

io

Q05

0S

P4.

INT

=O

FF

off

1S

P4.

INT

=O

NO

nly

chan

geab

le p

er k

ey o

r in

terf

ace

2S

P4=

PA

RA

M.F

LXO

nly

to b

e op

erat

ed a

t pa

ram

eter

men

u

3S

P4=

DE

LTA

.PA

Rde

lta o

nly

to b

e op

erat

ed a

t pa

ram

eter

men

u

4S

P4=

RA

TIO

.TR

KS

R3

trac

ks t

he a

ctua

l Rat

io

Q06

0

SP

.EX

T=

OF

Fo

ff1

SP

.EX

T=

AI0

1A

I01

2S

P.E

XT

=A

I02

AI0

2

xy=

11 t

o14

SP

.EX

T=

AIx

yA

Ixy

0S

P.C

OM

P=

OF

Fo

ff

1S

P.C

OM

P=

ON

on

Ro

uti

ng

IC

3: P

rin

cip

le i

s th

e sa

me

as f

or

IC1

(see

Q01

)

Ro

uti

ng

IC

4: P

rin

cip

le i

s th

e sa

me

as f

or

IC1

(see

Q01

)

B05 SETPOINTSB04 ROUTING_IC-AI

Ext

erna

l se

tpoi

nt

Q07

Com

pute

r se

tpoi

nt

Ro

uti

ng

IC

2: P

rin

cip

le i

s th

e sa

me

as f

or

IC1

(see

Q01

)

Q02

SP

1 as

pa

ram

eter

(is

th

en p

art

of t

he

conf

igur

atio

n)

R

outin

g of

bi

nary

sig

nal

with

BIx

setp

oint

3 =

ra

tio s

etpo

int

2 S

R2

setp

oint

4 =

ra

tio s

etpo

int

3 S

R3

B05 SETPOINTS

setp

oint

2 =

ra

tio s

etpo

int

1 S

R1

TA

B4.

AI

T

able

4

conn

ecte

d w

ith

P1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 RATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION

42/61-10010 EN

n n d

B08

Q01

0A

LRM

1=O

FF

Ala

rm v

alue

with

out

func

tion

1A

LA

RM

1 P

V-M

INA

larm

val

ue

to P

V-M

in2

ALA

RM

1 P

V-M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

to

PV

-Max

3A

LM1

ER

R-M

INA

larm

val

ue t

o E

rr-M

in

4A

LM1

ER

R-M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

to

Err

-Max

6A

LM1

|ER

R|-M

XA

larm

val

ue t

o I

Err

I-M

ax

7A

L1 E

R,S

P%

MIN

Ala

rm v

alue

to

Err

-Min

in %

of

SP

Ala

rm v

alue

18

AL1

ER

,SP

%M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

to

Err

-Max

in %

of

SP

10A

L1 |E

R| S

%,M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

to

I E

rr I

-Max

in %

of

SP

11A

L1 D

X/D

T-M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

dx/

dt M

ax

12A

L1 R

AT

IO M

INA

larm

val

ue R

= M

in.

for

inpu

t R

atio

13A

L1 R

AT

IO M

AX

Ala

rm v

alue

R =

Max

. fo

r in

put

Rat

io

14A

L1 O

UT

-MIN

Ala

rm v

alue

to

Out

-Min

15A

L1 O

UT

-MA

XA

larm

val

ue t

o O

ut-M

ax

B08 ALARMS

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP

Not for alarm station


qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

B07

Q01

1M

OD

E=

MA

N/A

UT

OM

anu

al/A

uto

mat

ic

2M

OD

E=

MA

Non

ly m

anua

l

3M

OD

E=

AU

TO

only

aut

omat

ic

oper

atio

n m

ode

4M

OD

E=

AU

TO

_MIN

only

aut

omat

ic,m

anua

l adj

ustm

ent

has

effe

ct o

min

.thr

esho

ld f

or O

ut

5M

OD

E=

AU

TO

_MA

Xon

ly a

utom

atic

,man

ual a

djus

tmen

t ha

s ef

fect

om

ax.t

hres

hold

for

Out

7M

AN

/AU

TO

/DD

Cm

anua

l/aut

omat

ic/c

ompu

ter(

DD

C)

8M

AN

/DD

Cm

anua

l/com

pute

r(D

DC

)

Q02

0T

RA

CK

SP

OF

FS

P1

trac

kin

g f

or

Man

OF

F

1T

RA

CK

SP

/AC

TS

P1

trac

king

for

Man

On

has

effe

ct o

n S

P1

anR

AM

P

2T

RA

CK

SP

SP

1 tr

acki

ng f

or M

an O

n ha

s ef

fect

onl

y on

R

AM

P

Q03

0D

DC

=O

FF

no

DD

C

1D

DC

=M

AN

,HO

LDIn

cas

e of

com

pute

r fa

ilure

:

M

anua

l + la

st c

orre

ctio

n va

lue

2D

DC

=M

AN

,OU

T=

0M

an.

+ s

afet

y co

rrec

t. v

alue

0%

DD

C f

unct

ion

3D

DC

=M

AN

,DV

1M

anua

l + s

afet

y va

lue

DV

1 (o

n O

ut1)

4D

DC

=M

AN

,DV

2M

anua

l + s

afet

y va

lue

DV

2 (o

n O

ut2)

5D

DC

=A

UT

Obe

gins

aut

omat

ical

ly w

ith la

st c

orre

ctio

n va

lue

0S

P-A

CT

UA

LA

dju

sted

set

po

int

1S

P-C

OM

PC

ompu

ter

setp

oint

2P

V-A

CT

UA

Lla

st c

ontr

ol v

aria

ble

(PV

-tra

ckin

g)

Q05

1P

OW

ER

=O

LD

MO

DE

Pre

vio

us

op

erat

ion

mo

de

2P

OW

ER

=M

AN

,HLD

Man

ual l

ast

corr

ectio

n va

lue

3P

OW

ER

=M

AN

,0%

Man

ual s

afet

y co

rrec

t. v

alue

0%

4P

OW

ER

=M

AN

,DV

1M

anua

l saf

ety

valu

e D

V1

5P

OW

ER

=M

AN

,DV

2M

anua

l saf

ety

valu

e D

V2

Q06

1?A

I=O

LD M

OD

EN

o ch

ange

2?

AI=

MA

N,H

OL

DM

anu

al l

ast

corr

ecti

on

val

ue

3?A

I=M

AN

,0%

Man

ual s

afet

y co

rrec

t. v

alue

0%

4?A

I=M

AN

,DV

1M

anua

l saf

ety

valu

e D

V1

5?A

I=M

AN

,DV

2M

anua

l saf

ety

valu

e D

V2

B07 CONTR.MODES

Ope

ratio

n m

ode

afte

r m

ains

re

sum

ptio

n

Q04

SP

bac

k-up

set

poin

t in

ca

se o

f co

mp.

fa

ilure

(H

OS

T)

SP

-Tra

ckin

g (S

P is

set

to

PV

)

Ope

ratio

n m

ode

durin

g fa

ult

at

inpu

t (f

ault

on

PV

)

B07 CONTR.MODES

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

1732

MA

N 0

% D

YN

AM

chan

ge 0

to

1 sw

itche

s: A

UT

-MA

N(O

UT

=0%

)-A

UT

0M

AN

DV

1 B

I=O

FF

no

fu

nct

ion

1M

AN

DV

1=B

I01

by B

I01

2M

AN

DV

1=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

AN

DV

1=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

1M

AN

DV

1 S

TA

TIC

bin

ary

inp

ut

(0=

AU

T;1

=M

AN

wit

h O

UT

=D

V1)

2M

AN

DV

1 D

YN

AM

chan

ge 0

to

1 sw

itche

s:A

UT-

MA

N(O

UT=

DV

1)-

AU

T

0M

AN

DV

2 B

I=O

FF

no

fu

nct

ion

1M

AN

DV

2=B

I01

by B

I01

2M

AN

DV

2=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

AN

DV

2=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

1M

AN

DV

2 S

TA

TIC

bin

ary

inp

ut

(0=

AU

T;1

=M

AN

wit

h O

UT

=D

V2)

2M

AN

DV

2 D

YN

AM

Cha

nge

0 to

1 s

witc

hes:

AU

T-M

AN

(OU

T=D

V2)

-AU

T

B09 BIN.INPUTS

depe

nds

on :

Q10

Dyn

.<--

>S

tat.

fun

ctio

n de

pend

s on

:

Q09

C

hang

eove

r to

m

anua

l mod

e w

ith d

efin

ed

valu

e 2

(DV

2)

Q07

C

hang

eove

r to

m

anua

l mod

e w

ith d

efin

ed

valu

e 1

(DV

1)

Q08

Dyn

.<--

>S

tat.

fun

ctio

n de

pend

s on

:

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURLOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1


Q02

n=

0 to

15

Ala

rm v

alue

22

AL

AR

M2

PV

.MA

XD

efau

lt a

larm

val

ue

to P

V-M

ax

Q03

n=

0 to

15

Ala

rm v

alue

33

AL

AR

M3

ER

R.M

IND

efau

lt a

larm

val

ue

to E

rr-M

in

Q04

n=

0 to

15

Ala

rm v

alue

44

AL

AR

M4

ER

R.M

AX

Def

ault

ala

rm v

alu

e to

Err

-Max

adju

stab

le in

dis

play

ed in

1A

LM

1 O

P/O

PO

per

atio

n l

evel

O

per

atio

n l

evel

2A

LM1

PA

R/O

PP

ara-

leve

l

O

pera

tion

leve

l

3A

LM1

PA

R/P

AR

Par

a-Le

vel

Par

a-Le

vel

adju

stab

le in

dis

play

ed in

1A

LM

2 O

P/O

PO

per

atio

n l

evel

O

per

atio

n l

evel

2A

LM2

PA

R/O

PP

ara-

leve

l

O

pera

tion

leve

l

3A

LM2

PA

R/P

AR

Par

a-Le

vel

Par

a-Le

vel

adju

stab

le in

dis

play

ed in

1A

LM3

OP

/OP

Op

erat

ion

lev

el

Op

erat

ion

lev

el

2A

LM3

PA

R/O

PP

ara-

leve

l

O

pera

tion

leve

l

3A

LM

3 P

AR

/PA

RP

ara-

Leve

l

P

ara-

Leve

l

adju

stab

le in

dis

play

ed in

1A

LM4

OP

/OP

Op

erat

ion

lev

el

Op

erat

ion

lev

el2

ALM

4 P

AR

/OP

Par

a-le

vel

Ope

ratio

n le

vel

3A

LM

4 P

AR

/PA

RP

ara-

Leve

l

P

ara-

Leve

l

B09

0M

AN

BI=

OFF

no

fu

nct

ion

1M

AN

=B

I01

by B

I01

2M

AN

=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

AN

=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

1M

AN

ST

AT

ICb

inar

y in

pu

t (0

= P

RE

VIO

US

MO

DE

,1 =

MA

N)

2M

AN

DY

NA

MIC

chan

ging

0 t

o 1

switc

hes

MA

N-A

UT

-MA

N

0M

AN

0%

BI=

OF

Fn

o f

un

ctio

n1

MA

N 0

%=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2M

AN

0%

=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

AN

0%

=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

1M

AN

0%

STA

TIC

bin

ary

inp

ut

(0=

AU

T;1

=M

AN

wit

h O

UT

=0%

)

Ala

rm v

alue

4 li

ke a

larm

val

ue 1

B08 ALARMSB08 ALARMSA

larm

val

ue 3

like

ala

rm v

alue

1

Ala

rm v

alue

2 li

ke a

larm

val

ue 1

Q06

Dyn

.<--

>S

tat.

fun

ctio

n

Q05

Typ

e al

arm

3

Q08

Typ

e al

arm

4

Typ

e al

arm

2

Q07

Typ

e al

arm

1

Q06

Q01

C

hang

eove

r to

M

anua

l with

la

st O

ut-v

alue

Q02

Dyn

.<--

>S

tat.

fun

ctio

n de

pend

s on

:

Q5

C

hang

eove

r to

m

anua

l mod

e w

ith O

ut =

0%

B09 BIN.INPUTS

ATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

42/61-10010 EN1

LES

S=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2LE

SS

=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6LE

SS

=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q21

0C

OM

P N

OT

BI

no

t u

sed

1C

OM

PU

TE

R=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2C

OM

PU

TE

R=

BI0

2by

BI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

6C

OM

PU

TE

R=

BIx

yby

BIx

y

B10

Q01

Rou

ting

0O

UT

1 N

O A

Ofo

r sw

itchi

ng c

ontr

olle

rs

1O

UT

1 C

ON

=A

O01

AO

01

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

1 C

ON

=A

Oxy

AO

xy

0O

UT

2=N

O A

Oun

used

1O

UT

2 C

ON

AO

01A

O01

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

2 C

ON

AO

xyA

Oxy

0O

UT

A=

NO

AO

No

ou

tpu

t

1O

UT

A=

AO

01A

O01

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

A=

AO

xyA

Oxy

B10 ROUTE OUT

100%

/60s

-ad

just

men

t

Com

puta

tion

read

y

OU

T1

to a

co

ntin

. co

ntro

l-le

r ou

tput

AO

xy

Q02

Rou

ting

OU

T2

to a

co

ntin

. co

ntro

l-le

r ou

tput

AO

x yQ

03 R

outin

g O

ut t

o A

Ox

Dia

gram

of

posi

tion

disp

lay

Out

for

sw

itch-

ing

cont

rolle

rs

and

split

ran

ge

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIOLOOP1 LOOP1 L


Q11

0T

RC

KO

UT

BI=

OF

(Ou

t =

AIx

y)1

TR

CK

OU

T=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2T

RC

KO

UT

=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6T

RC

KO

UT

=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q12

0S

PR

AM

P B

I=O

FF

SP

ram

p s

top

ped

1S

PR

AM

P=

0=B

I01

by B

I01

2S

PR

AM

P=

0=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6S

PR

AM

P=

0=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q13

SP

0S

P1-

4 B

x=O

FF

No

set

po

int

chan

geo

ver

wit

h B

Ix1

SP

1-4

Bx=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2S

P1-

4 B

x=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6S

P1-

4 B

x=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q14

SP

0S

P1-

4 B

y=O

FF

No

set

po

int

chan

geo

ver

wit

h B

Iy1

SP

1-4

By=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2S

P1-

4 B

y=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6S

P1-

4 B

y=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q15

0S

PI-

EX

T B

I O

Fo

ut

of

fun

ctio

n

1S

PI-

EX

T=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2S

PI-

EX

T=

BI0

2by

BI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

6S

PI-

EX

T=

BIx

yby

BIx

y

Q16

DIR

<->

INV

0

CH

AR

BI=

OF

Fo

ut

of

fun

ctio

n

1C

HA

R=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2C

HA

R=

BI0

2by

BI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

6C

HA

R=

BIx

yby

BIx

y

Q17

Sta

tic0

LO

CK

SP

BI=

OF

ou

t o

f fu

nct

ion

1LO

CK

SP

=B

I01

by B

I01

2LO

CK

SP

=B

I02

by B

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

6LO

CK

SP

=B

Ixy

by B

Ixy

Q18

Ena

blin

g0

RE

MO

TE

BI=

OF

FIn

hib

itio

n o

f re

mo

te a

dju

stm

ent

1R

EM

OT

E S

Pon

ly s

etpo

int

(in a

ll op

erat

ion

stat

es)

2R

EM

OT

E O

UT

only

cor

rect

ion

valu

e (in

man

ual)

3A

=S

P,M

=O

UT

setp

oint

is a

utom

atic

, O

UT

is m

anua

l

Q19

Rem

ote

ad-

0M

OR

E B

I=O

FF

ou

t o

f fu

nct

ion

1M

OR

E=

BI0

1by

BI0

1

2M

OR

E=

BI0

2by

BI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

OR

E=

BIx

yby

BIx

y

Q20

Rem

ote

0L

ES

S B

I=O

FF

ou

t o

f fu

nct

ion

B09 BIN.INPUTS B09 BIN.INPUTS B09 BIN.INPUTS

stat

ic

chan

geov

er o

f ch

arac

teris

tic

lock

ing

of t

he

SP

-adj

ustm

ent

capa

bilit

y

ajus

tmen

t (le

ss)

of r

emot

e ad

just

men

t (s

tatic

)

just

men

t (m

ore)

10

0%/6

0s-

adju

stm

ent

chan

geov

er:D

efin

ition

of

BIy

(B

05-Q

11)

Ram

p st

op

stat

ic

chan

geov

er:D

efin

ition

of

BIx

(B

05-Q

11)

Sw

itch

on

outp

ut t

rack

ing

SP

(int)

<->

SP

xt

stat

ic c

hang

e-ov

er f

rom

inte

r-na

l (S

P1

to 4

) to

exte

rnal

SP

N CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATIONOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s

1.menu2.menu

175xy

=2

to 5

ALA

RM

3=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6A

LAR

M3=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q04

0

AL

AR

M4=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1A

LAR

M4=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5A

LAR

M4=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6A

LAR

M4=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q05

0

MA

N=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t1

MA

N=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5M

AN

=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6M

AN

=B

Oxy

BO

xy

Q06

Fee

dbac

k0

AU

TO

=N

O B

ON

o o

utp

ut

1A

UT

O=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5A

UT

O=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6A

UT

O=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q08

0

WE

XT

=N

O B

ON

o o

utp

ut

1W

EX

T=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5W

EX

T=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6W

EX

T=

BO

xyB

Oxy

B

Ala

rm v

alue

3

to o

utpu

t

Fee

dbac

k si

gnal

-ext

erna

l se

tpoi

nt

Ala

rm v

alue

4

to o

utpu

t

B11 BIN. OUTPUTS

sign

al

auto

mat

ic t

o ou

tput

Fee

dbac

k si

gnal

man

ual

to o

utpu

t

CONFIGURATION CON LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

CONFIGURATION


Q04

0O

UT

1=N

O B

Ofo

r co

nti

nu

ou

s co

ntr

oll

er

1O

UT

1=B

O01

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5O

UT

1=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6O

UT

1=B

Oxy

BO

xy

0O

UT

2=N

O B

Ofo

r co

nti

nu

ou

s co

ntr

oll

er

1O

UT

2=B

O01

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5O

UT

2=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6O

UT

2=B

Oxy

BO

xy

Q06

0O

UT

.L M

IT=

OF

Fal

way

s in

activ

e (f

or s

tep

cont

rolle

r)

1O

UT

.L M

IT=

AU

Tac

tive

on

ly i

n a

uto

mat

ic o

per

atio

n

2O

UT

.L M

IT=

ON

activ

e in

man

ual a

nd a

utom

atic

ope

ratio

n

Q08

0O

UT

-MA

X=

PA

Rin

tern

al p

aram

eter

1O

UT

-MA

X=

AI0

1ro

uted

thr

ough

AI0

1

2O

UT

-MA

X=

AI0

2ro

uted

thr

ough

AI0

2

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

-MA

X=

AIx

yro

uted

thr

ough

AIx

y

Q09

0O

UT

-MIN

=P

AR

inte

rnal

par

amet

er

1O

UT

-MIN

=A

I01

rout

ed t

hrou

gh A

I01

2O

UT

-MIN

=A

I02

rout

ed t

hrou

gh A

I02

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

-MIN

=A

Ixy

rout

ed t

hrou

gh A

Ixy

Q10

0O

UT

-TR

CK

=O

FF

No

Ou

t tr

acki

ng

1O

UT

-TR

CK

=A

I01

Out

= A

I01

if B

Ix

2O

UT

-TR

CK

=A

I02

Out

= A

Ixy

if B

Ix

xy=

11 t

o 1

3O

UT

-TR

CK

=A

Ixy

Out

= A

Ixy

if B

Ix

B11

Q01

0

AL

AR

M1=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1A

LAR

M1=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5A

LAR

M1=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6A

LAR

M1=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q02

0

AL

AR

M2=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1A

LAR

M2=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5A

LAR

M2=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6A

LAR

M2=

BO

xyB

Oxy

Q03

0

AL

AR

M3=

NO

BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1A

LAR

M3=

BO

01B

O01

B10 ROUTE OUT

Out

-max

in

t./e

xter

n.

defin

ed

Out

-min

in

t./e

xter

n.

defin

ed

11 BIN. OUTPUTS

Ala

rm v

alue

2

to o

utpu

t

Q05

Rou

ting

of

Out

2 o

BO

x se

cond

sw

itch

cont

act(

for

step

co

ntro

ller’l

ess’

)

B10 ROUTE OUT

Out

put

limits

Rou

ting

Out

1 to

B

Ox

Firs

t sw

itch

cont

act

(for

ste

p co

n-tr

olle

r "m

ore’

)

Out

tra

ck (

see

B09

-Q11

)

Ala

rm v

alue

1

to o

utpu

t

FIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

qu

estio

n /

par

amet

er

mo

d-

ule

des

crip

tion

sett

ing

s1.menu2.menu

42/61-10010 ENQ

04

0A

LA

RM

4=N

O F

LG

Ala

rm v

alu

e4 n

ot

con

nec

ted

to

an

y F

lag

1A

LAR

M4=

FLG

01D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

1

n=

2 to

5A

LAR

M4=

FLG

0nD

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

n

6A

LAR

M4=

FLG

06D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

6

B01

Q01

0P

RO

GR

1=O

FF

No

t ac

tiva

ted

,wit

ho

ut

fun

ctio

n

Pro

gram

11

PG

1-S

TA

RT

SP

0S

tart

at

prog

ram

med

val

ue

2P

G1-

ST

AR

T P

VS

tart

at

inst

anta

neou

s va

lue

Q0n

P

rogr

am n

n=

2 to

9

Q10

0P

G10

=O

FF

No

t ac

tiva

ted

, w

ith

ou

t fu

nct

ion

Pro

gram

10

1P

G10

-ST

AR

T S

P0

Sta

rt a

t pr

ogra

mm

ed v

alue

2P

G10

-ST

AR

T P

VS

tart

at

inst

anta

neou

s va

lue

0P

RG

-RE

SE

TP

rog

ram

res

et a

fter

mai

ns

resu

mp

tio

n

1P

RG

-CO

NT

INU

EO

ld m

ode

afte

r m

ains

res

umpt

ion

Pro

gra

m 2

to

9

Q01

B01 PROGRAMS (activ.

LOOP1/B05/Q08)

B02

P

OW

ER

F

AIL

PR

OG

RA

MM

ER

PR

OG

RA

MM

ER

P

RO

GR

AM

ME

R

Ala

rm v

alue

4

CONFIGUR LOOP1 PROGRAMMER

CONFIGURATION


Q09

0

PR

G.H

I=N

O B

ON

o o

utp

ut

1P

RG

.HI=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5P

RG

.HI=

BO

xyB

Oxy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6P

RG

.HI=

BO

xyB

O76

Q10

Bin

ary

0P

RG

.BIN

1=N

.BO

No

ou

tpu

t1

PR

G.B

IN1=

BO

01B

O01

xy=

2 to

5P

RG

.BIN

1=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6P

RG

.BIN

1=B

Oxy

BO

xy

Q11

Bin

ary

0P

RG

.BIN

2=N

.BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1P

RG

.BIN

2=B

O01

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5P

RG

.BIN

2=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6P

RG

.BIN

2=B

Oxy

BO

xy

Q12

Bin

ary

0P

RG

.BIN

3=N

.BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1P

RG

.BIN

3=B

O01

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5P

RG

.BIN

3=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6P

RG

.BIN

3=B

Oxy

v

Q13

Bin

ary

0P

RG

.BIN

4=N

.BO

No

ou

tpu

t

1P

RG

.BIN

4=B

O01

BO

01

xy=

2 to

5P

RG

.BIN

4=B

Oxy

BO

xy

xy=

11 t

o 1

6P

RG

.BIN

4=B

Oxy

BO

xy

B12

Q01

0

AL

AR

M1=

NO

FL

GA

larm

val

ue1

no

t co

nn

ecte

d t

o a

ny

Fla

g

1A

LAR

M1=

FLG

01D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

1

n=

2 to

5A

LAR

M1=

FLG

0nD

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

n

6A

LAR

M1=

FLG

06D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

6

Q02

0

AL

AR

M2=

FL

GA

larm

val

ue2

no

t co

nn

ecte

d t

o a

ny

Fla

g

1A

LAR

M2=

FLG

01D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

1

n=

2 to

5A

LAR

M2=

FLG

0nD

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

n

6A

LAR

M2=

FLG

06D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

6

Q03

0

AL

AR

M3=

NO

FL

GA

larm

val

ue3

no

t co

nn

ecte

d t

o a

ny

Fla

g

1A

LAR

M3=

FLG

01D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

1

n=

2 to

5A

LAR

M3=

FLG

0nD

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

n

6A

LAR

M3=

FLG

06D

ispl

ay w

ith F

lag

6

B12 BIN.FLAGSB11 BIN. OUTPUTS

trac

k 1

of t

he

prog

ram

er t

o bi

nary

out

put

trac

k 2

of t

he

prog

ram

mer

to

bina

ry o

utpu

t

Pro

gram

end

si

gnal

to

outp

ut

trac

k 3

of t

he

prog

ram

er t

o bi

nary

out

put

trac

k 4

of t

he

prog

ram

er t

o bi

nary

out

put

Ala

rm v

alue

1

Ala

rm v

alue

2

Ala

rm v

alue

3

ATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

ques

tion

/

para

met

er

mod

-ul

ede

scrip

tion

setti

ngs

1.menu2.menu

177P

15In

pu

tR

HO

-MA

X

P16

Inp

ut

DIS

TA

NC

E

P17

Inp

ut

T-R

EF

ER

EN

C

1O

VE

RP

RE

SS

UR

E

2A

BS

.PR

ES

SU

RE

P20

Inp

ut

CO

MP

.CO

EF

Z1

. .

.In

pu

tC

OM

P.C

OE

F Z

n (

n=

2 to

8)

P28

Inp

ut

CO

MP

.CO

EF

Z9

0S

C1

P-T

M-l

in

1S

C1

P-T

M-S

QR

P30

Inp

ut

RA

NG

E L

OS

tart

val

ue o

f th

e va

lue

area

of

the

corr

ect.

sig

nal.

fact

ory

pre

set:

0.0

;

rang

e: -

9999

bis

999

99

P31

Inp

ut

RA

NG

E H

IE

nd v

alue

of

the

valu

e ar

ea o

f th

e co

rrec

ted

sign

al.

fact

ory

pre

set:

100

.0

; ra

nge:

-99

99 b

is

9999

9

B01 TASK

Q29

sig

nal

squa

re r

oote

d or

not

Q18

O

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION STATE CORR 1 STATE CORR

in ax in ax

--

--

--

-H

AB

--

--

--

-T

vgl

--

--

--

-x

xx

xx

xx

-x

xx

xx

xx

--

--

--

Z(1

)Z

(1)

--

--

--

Z(n

)Z

(n)

--

--

--

Z(9

)Z

(9)

-x

xx

xx

xx

-x

xx

xx

xx

RH

Om

axR

HO

max


B01

Q01

0U

NU

SE

Du

nu

sed

(se

e C

onfi-

Loop

1-B

04-Q

0x-9

1)

1S

C1

GA

S O

RIF

Gas

flo

w (

m3/

h)-d

iffer

entia

l pre

ssur

e m

etho

d

2S

C1

GA

S V

OLU

MG

as f

low

(m

3/h)

-vol

ume

mea

sure

men

t

3S

C1

ST

EA

M,O

RI

Ste

am m

ass

flow

-diff

eren

tial p

ress

ure

4S

C1

S.S

TE

AM

,PS

atur

ated

ste

am p

ress

ure

corr

ectio

n

5S

C1

S.S

TE

AM

,TS

atur

ated

ste

am t

empe

ratu

re c

orre

ctio

n

6S

C1

WA

TE

R O

RI

Wat

er m

ass

flow

-diff

eren

tial p

ress

ure

7S

C1

WA

TE

R V

OL

Wat

er m

ass

flow

-vol

ume

mea

sure

men

t

8S

C1

BO

IL.L

EV

.T

ank

wat

er le

vel

P02

Inp

ut

Qn

-CA

LC

UL

P03

Inp

ut

dP

-CA

LC

UL

P04

Inp

ut

P-a

tm-C

AL

CU

L

P05

Inp

ut

P-C

AL

CU

L

P06

Inp

ut

T-C

AL

CU

L

P07

Inp

ut

Z-C

AL

CU

L

P08

Inp

ut

RH

O-C

AL

CU

L

P09

Inp

ut

Q-H

I

P10

Inp

ut

P-M

IN

P11

Inp

ut

P-M

AX

P12

Inp

ut

T-M

IN

P13

Inp

ut

T-M

AX

P14

Inp

ut

RH

O-M

IN

B01 TASK

Sta

te c

orre

ctio

n 1

B01 TASK

ST

AT

E C

OR

R 1

S

TA

TE

CO

RR

1

S

TA

TE

CO

RR

1

GAS ORIF

GAS VOL

S.STEAM,P

S.STEAM,T

SATTD-T

WATER ORI

WAT. VOL

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION 1 STATE CORR 1 STATE CORR 1

rese

rved

Qn,

rQ

m,r

-Q

m,r

Qm

,rQ

m,r

--

dP,r

dP,r

-dP

,rdP

,rdP

,r-

-

Pat

m,r

--

Pat

m,r

Pat

m,r

Pat

m,r

Pat

m,r

Pat

m,r

PO

K,r

--

-

T,r

T,r

-T

,rT

,r-

--

Z,r

--

--

--

-

RH

Onr

--

--

--

RH

Onr

Pm

in-

Pm

inP

min

Pm

inP

min

Pm

inP

m

Pm

ax-

Pm

axP

max

Pm

axP

max

Pm

axP

m

Tm

in-

Tm

inT

min

Tm

inT

min

Tm

inT

m

Tm

ax-

Tm

axT

max

Tm

axT

max

Tm

axT

m

--

--

--

PO

K,r

PO

K,r

PO

K,r

PO

K,r

RH

Om

inR

HO

min

ques

tion

/

para

met

er

mod

-ul

ede

scrip

tion

setti

ngs

1.menu2.menu

42/61-10010 EN
ques

tion

/

para

met

er

mod

-ul

ede

scrip

tion

setti

ngs

1.menu2.menu

Q32

1S

C1

NO

DIM

No

dim

ensi

on

2S

C1

US

ER

DIM

4-di

git,

sel

f de

finab

le P

33

7S

C1

DIM

m3/

hm

3/h

8S

C1

DIM

kg/

hkg

/h

9S

C1

DIM

t/h

t/h

13S

C1

DIM

mm

mm

14S

C1

DIM

mm

P33

Inpu

tD

IME

NS

ION

Ed

itin

g o

f th

e us

er d

imen

sio

n if

Q32

= 2

B02

1IS

C_Q

=A

I01

AI0

1

2IS

C_Q

=A

I02

AI0

2

xy=

11 to

14

ISC

_Q=

AIx

yA

Ixy

0IS

C_P

_CA

LCN

ot

used

(P

= P

r)

1IS

C_P

=A

I01

AI0

1

2IS

C_P

=A

I02

AI0

2

xy=

11 to

14

ISC

_P=

AIx

yA

Ixy

0IS

C_T

_CA

LCn

ot

used

(T =

Tr)

1IS

C_T

=A

I01

AI0

1

2IS

C_T

=A

I02

AI0

2

xy=

11 to

14

ISC

_T=

AIx

yA

Ixy

0IS

C_D

EN

S_C

AL

Cn

ot u

sed

(Rh

o =

Rho

nr)

1IS

C_D

EN

S=

AI0

1A

I01

2IS

C_D

EN

S=

AI0

2A

I02

xy=

11 to

14

ISC

_DE

NS

=A

Ixy

AIx

y

B03

0S

C1=

NO

AO

no

ou

tpu

t

1S

C1=

AO

01A

O01

xy=

11 to

13

SC

1=A

Oxy

AO

xy

F04

Den

sity

m

easu

red

valu

e in

kg/

m3

Q03

T

empe

ratu

re

mea

sure

d va

lue

(T)

in °

C

B02 ROUTING_AI

Dim

ensi

on f

or

AI0

1

Q02

Pre

ssur

e m

easu

red

valu

e (P

) in

bar

Q01

Mea

sure

d flo

w ,

diff

eren

tial

pres

sure

whe

n B

01-Q

01=

8

B03 ROUTIN

G AO

Q01

Sta

te

corr

ectio

n to

an

alog

out

put

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION STATE CORR 1

CONFIGURATION STATE CORR 1

179

19 Tables for the parameter setting menu

ENT

user setting

ETER

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 19 "Tables for the parameter setting menu"

min. max.

10 TAB1.0 Checkpt. 0 at 0% 0,0

11 TAB1.1 Checkpt. val. 1 at 10% 0,1




15 TAB1.5 Checkpt. val. 5 at 50% -9999 99999 EU 0,0001 0,5











35 TAB2.5 Checkpt. val. 5 at 50% -9999 99999 EU 0,0001 0,5






50 TAB3.0

. . . . . . . . . .

60 TAB3.10

70 TAB4.0

. . . . .

80 TAB4.10

as tables 1 and 2

1.m

enu

2.m

enu

Tab

le 1

INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT INSTRUM

parameter number

unit factory settingrange

textT

able

2T

able

3T

able

4

descriptionmaxi-mum reso-lution

as tables 1 and 2

PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAM

INS

TR

UM

EN

T

INS

TR

UM

EN

T

IN

ST

RU

ME

NT

I

NS

TR

UM

EN

T P

AR

AM

ET

ER

PA

RA

ME

TE

R

P

AR

AM

ET

ER

PA

RA

ME

TE

R

42/61-10010 EN27

RA

TE

TIM

E 2

Der

iativ

e tim

e T

d2 (

activ

e)0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01

min

0,1

min

28R

AT

EG

AIN

2R

ate

gain

Gd2

110

ohne

0,00

015

29M

AN

UA

L R

ES

ET

2M

anua

l res

et M

R2

(act

ive)

-100

+10

0%

0,1

50

30G

AIN

2 L

OLo

w G

2 fo

r pa

ram

eter

con

trol

0,00

110

00oh

ne0,

0001

1

31G

AIN

2 H

IH

igh

G2

for

para

met

er c

ontr

ol0,

001

1000

ohne

0,00

011

32T

r2 L

OLo

w T

r2 f

or p

aram

eter

con

trol

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

5 m

in

33T

r2 H

IH

igh

Tr2

for

par

amet

er c

ontr

ol0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01

min

0,5

min

34T

d2

LO

Low

Td2

for

par

amet

er c

ontr

ol0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01m

in0,

1 m

in

35T

d2

HI

Hig

h T

d2 f

or p

aram

eter

con

trol

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

1 m

in

36M

R2

LO

Low

MR

2 fo

r pa

ram

eter

con

trol

-100

+10

0%

0,1

50

37M

R2

HI

Hig

h M

R2

for

para

met

er c

ontr

ol-1

00+

100

%0,

150

Second PIDfor spl.rang G2 control Tr2 control Td2 control

MR2 control

PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMET LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1 L

r ng

180 Digitric 100, Chapter 19 "Tables for the parameter setting menu"

1G

AIN

GC

ontr

olle

r ga

in G

(ac

tive)

0,00

110

00oh

ne0,

0001

1

2R

ES

ET

TIM

E T

rR

eset

tim

e T

r (a

ctiv

e)0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01

min

0,5

min

3D

ER

I. T

IME

Td

Der

ivat

ive

time

Td

(act

ive)

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

1 m

in

4R

AT

E G

AIN

Rat

e ga

in G

d1

10oh

ne0,

0001

5

5M

AN

UA

L R

ES

ET

1M

anua

l res

et M

R (

activ

e)-1

00+

100

%0,

150

6G

AIN

LO

Low

G f

or p

aram

eter

con

trol

0,00

110

00oh

ne0,

0001

17

GA

IN H

IH

igh

G f

or p

aram

eter

con

trol

0,00

110

00oh

ne0,

0001

1

8U

-GA

IN-L

OV

alue

of

U1

for

GA

IN L

O0

9U

-GA

IN-H

IV

alue

of

U1

for

GA

IN H

I0

10T

r-L

OLo

w T

r fo

r pa

ram

eter

con

trol

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

5 m

in

11T

r-H

IH

igh

Tr

for

para

met

er c

ontr

ol0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01

min

0,5

min

12U

-Tr

LO

Val

ue o

f U

2 fo

r T

r-LO

0

13U

-Tr

HI

Val

ue o

f U

2 fo

r T

r-H

I0

14T

d L

OLo

w T

d fo

r pa

ram

eter

con

trol

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

1 m

in

15T

d H

IH

igh

Td

for

para

met

er c

ontr

ol0

min

600

min

min

0,00

01

min

0,1

min

16U

-Td

LO

Val

ue o

f U

3 fo

r T

d LO

0

17U

-Td

HI

Val

ue o

f U

3 fo

r T

d H

I0

18M

R-L

OM

R-L

O f

or p

aram

eter

con

trol

-100

+10

0%

0,1

50

19M

R-H

IM

R-H

I fo

r pa

ram

eter

con

trol

-100

+10

0%

0,1

50

20U

-MR

LO

Sta

rt v

alue

of

U4

for

MR

-LO

0

21U

-MR

HI

End

val

ue o

f U

4 fo

r M

R-H

I0

25G

AIN

2C

ontr

olle

r ga

in G

2 (a

ctiv

e)0,

001

1000

ohne

0,00

011

26R

ES

ET

TIM

E 2

Res

et t

ime

Tr2

(ac

tive)

0 m

in60

0 m

inm

in0,

0001

m

in0,

5 m

in

param.set e+ H-Off-C

MR (manual reset) contr.

Td (deriv. Time) control

LO

OP

1

L

OO

P 1

L

OO

P 1

LO

OP

1

LO

OP

1

Con

trol

ing

valu

e U

2 is

def

ined

by:

C

ON

FI-

LOO

P1-

B02

-Q10

/Q12

PID-Parameter

Con

trol

ing

valu

e U

1 is

def

ined

by:

C

ON

FI-

LOO

P1-

B02

-Q07

/Q09

Tr (reset time) control

Con

trol

ing

valu

e U

3 is

def

ined

by:

C

ON

FI-

LOO

P1-

B02

-Q13

/Q15

Gain control

Con

trol

ing

valu

e U

4 is

def

ined

by:

C

ON

FI-

LOO

P1-

B02

-Q16

/Q18

EROOP1

G

U

co

ntr

ols

G

GA

IN L

O G

AIN

HI

LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1

U-G

AIN

-LO

U

-GA

IN-H

I

U

PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER

min

.m

ax.

1.menu2.menu

pa

ram

ete

r n

um

be

ru

sese

tti

un

itfa

cto

ry s

etti

ng

ran

ge

tex

td

es

cri

pti

on

max

i-m

um

re

so-

luti

on

181

r g

104

CO

NS

T4

Wei

ghtin

g fa

ctor

in in

put

sign

al c

onne

ctio

n

115

RA

TIO

MIN

Rat

io m

in.

099

999

EU

0,00

010

116

RA

TIO

MA

XR

atio

max

.0

9999

9E

U0,

0001

2

117

BIA

SB

ias

ratio

con

trol

-999

999

999

ohne

0,00

010

120

FF

:TIM

E-C

ON

ST

Tim

e co

nsta

nt d

/dt

0.00

.01

1.00

.00

h.m

m.s

s1s

0.00

.15

121

FF

:DIF

F-G

AIN

Diff

eren

tial g

ain

-10

10oh

ne0,

11

125

dY

-AM

OU

NT

1.po

sitio

ning

ste

p-1

00,0

+10

0,0

%0,

15,

0

126

MA

X.O

UT

.DU

RM

ax.s

tep

dura

tion

0.00

.09

20.0

0 h

h.m

m.s

s1

s15

s

127

MA

X-P

os.

ER

RM

ax.

perm

issi

ble

posi

t.co

ntro

l dev

iatio

n0,

0001

9999

9E

U0,

0001

9999

9

128

MA

X-N

eg.E

RR

Max

. pe

rmis

sibl

e ne

gat.

con

trol

dev

iatio

n0,

0001

9999

9E

U0,

0001

9999

9

TAG-NAME

199

Key

s ⇑

un

d ⇓

act

o

n t

ext

lin

e

TA

G n

ame:

A .

. .

Z,

a .

. .

.

Z,+

,.,/

,%,_

,),(

,°,

9 .

. .

0, s

paci

ng,-

,12

char

acte

r

Wfact

Disturbance value feedforw.Ratio 1 Selftune

Def

ault

-str

ing

"_

_ _

_ _

_ _

_ _

_ _

_"

PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOO


min

.m

ax.

1.menu2.menu

pa

ram

ete

r n

um

be

ru

sese

ttin

un

itfa

cto

ry s

etti

ng

ran

ge

tex

td

es

cri

pti

on

max

i-m

um

re

so-

luti

on

55D

EA

D Z

ON

ED

ead

zone

025

%%

0,1

0% (

For

On/

off

+ c

ontin

. co

ntr.

),

else

1%

56M

IN.P

UL

SE

TIM

EM

inim

um O

N p

erio

d S

tep

cont

rolle

r0

5 s

s0,

050,

05

57N

PE

R M

IN_1

Tra

nsfe

rs p

er m

inut

e Z

10,

0560

1/m

in0,

056

58N

PE

R M

IN 2

Tra

nsfe

rs p

er m

inut

e Z

20,

0560

1/m

in0,

056

59R

ES

ER

VE

DN

ot in

use

h.m

m.s

s0.

00.0

0 h

60R

ES

ER

VE

DN

ot in

use

h.m

m.s

s0.

00.0

0 h

61R

ES

ER

VE

DN

ot in

use

h.m

m.s

s0.

00.0

0 h

62R

ES

ER

VE

DN

ot in

use

h.m

m.s

s0.

00.0

0 h

67O

UT

_MIN

Con

trol

var

iabl

e m

in.

-510

0%

0,1

0

68O

UT

_MA

XC

ontr

ol v

aria

ble

max

.0

105

%0,

110

0

69O

UT

.RA

MP

+O

utpu

t va

riabl

e ra

mp

risin

g0,

199

99%

/s0,

001

9999

70O

UT

.RA

MP

-O

utpu

t va

riabl

e ra

mp

falli

ng0,

199

99%

/s0,

001

9999

71D

V1

Def

ined

val

ue 1

for

Out

put1

-510

5%

0,1

0

72D

V2

Def

ined

val

ue 2

for

Out

put2

-510

5%

0,1

0

75S

P_

MIN

Set

poin

t m

in.

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

01-9

999

76S

P_M

AX

Set

poin

t m

ax.

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

0199

999

77S

P.R

AM

P +

Set

poin

t ra

mp

risin

g0,

0001

9999

9E

U/s

0,00

0199

999

78T

OL

.SP

.RA

MP

+P

erm

issi

ble

diff

eren

ce b

etw

een

Set

poin

t an

d ac

tual

val

ue0

9999

9E

U0,

0001

9999

9

79S

P.R

AM

P-

Set

poin

t ra

mp

falli

ng0,

0001

9999

9E

U/s

0,00

0199

999

80T

OL

.SP

.RA

MP

-P

erm

issi

ble

diff

eren

ce b

etw

een

Set

poin

t an

d ac

tual

val

ue0

9999

9E

U0,

0001

9999

9

81S

P1

Set

poin

t 1

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

010

82S

P2

Set

poin

t 2

or d

elta

for

set

poin

t 1

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

010

83S

P3

Set

poin

t 3

or d

elta

for

set

poin

t 1

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

010

84S

P4

Set

poin

t 4

or d

elta

for

set

poin

t 1

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

010

91A

LA

RM

1A

larm

val

ue 1

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

01-9

999

92A

LA

RM

2A

larm

val

ue 2

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

0199

999

93A

LA

RM

3A

larm

val

ue 3

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

0199

999

94A

LA

RM

4A

larm

val

ue 4

-999

999

999

EU

0,00

0199

999

95H

YS

TE

RE

SIS

Hys

tere

sis

099

999

EU

0,00

011

96T

IME

-UN

ITT

ime

unit

for

dx/d

t al

arm

val

ue1

3oh

ne1

=s

2 =

min

3

= h

1

101

CO

NS

T1

Wei

ghtin

g fa

ctor

in in

put

sign

al c

onne

ctio

n

102

CO

NS

T2

Wei

ghtin

g fa

ctor

in in

put

sign

al c

onne

ctio

n-9

999

9999

9oh

ne0,

0001

1

103

CO

NS

T3

Wei

ghtin

g fa

ctor

in in

put

sign

al c

onne

ctio

n

Setpoints and alarmseighting ors of IC

Alarm valuesController output

PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER P 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP 1 LOOP1 LOOP1 LOOP1

PARAMETER PARAMETER

42/61-10010 EN

r g

24T

IME

n.8

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 8

0.00

.00

99.5

9.59

h.m

m.s

s1s

0.10

.00

25T

IME

n.9

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 9

26T

IME

n.1

0D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

10

27T

IME

n.1

1D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

11

28T

IME

n.1

2D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

12

29T

IME

n.1

3D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

13

30T

IME

n.1

4D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

14

31T

IME

n.1

5D

urat

ion

time

segm

ent

15

1se

PROGRAM n (n=1 to 1ARAMETER PARAMETE

182 Digitric 100, Chapter 19 "Tables for the parameter setting menu"

min

.m

ax.

1.menu2.menu

pa

ram

ete

r n

um

be

ru

sese

ttin

un

itfa

cto

ry s

etti

ng

ran

ge

tex

td

es

cri

pti

on

max

i-m

um

re

so-

luti

on

1

VA

LU

E n

.0

2V

AL

UE

n.1

Set

poin

t 1

(end

of

time

segm

ent

1)

3V

AL

UE

n.2

Set

poin

t 2

(end

of

time

segm

ent

2)

4V

AL

UE

n.3

Set

poin

t 3

(end

of

time

segm

ent

3)-9

999

9999

9E

U0,

0001

-999

99

5V

AL

UE

n.4

Set

poin

t 4

(end

of

time

segm

ent

4)

6V

AL

UE

n.5

Set

poin

t 5

(end

of

time

segm

ent

5)

7V

AL

UE

n.6

Set

poin

t 6

(end

of

time

segm

ent

6)

8V

AL

UE

n.7

Set

poin

t 7

(end

of

time

segm

ent

7)

9V

AL

UE

n.8

Set

poin

t 8

(end

of

time

segm

ent

8)

10V

AL

UE

n.9

Set

poin

t 9

(end

of

time

segm

ent

9)

11V

AL

UE

n.1

0S

etpo

int

10 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

10)

12V

AL

UE

n.1

1S

etpo

int

11 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

11)

13V

AL

UE

n.1

2S

etpo

int

12 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

12)

14V

AL

UE

n.1

3S

etpo

int

13 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

13)

15V

AL

UE

n.1

4S

etpo

int

14 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

14)

16V

AL

UE

n.1

5S

etpo

int

15 (

end

of t

ime

segm

ent

15)

17T

IME

n.1

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 1

18T

IME

n.2

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 2

19T

IME

n.3

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 3

20T

IME

n.4

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 4

21T

IME

n.5

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 5

22T

IME

n.6

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 6

23T

IME

n.7

Dur

atio

n tim

e se

gmen

t 7

PR

OG

RA

M n

(n

=1

to 1

0)

PR

OG

RA

M n

(n

=1

to 1

0)

P

RO

GR

AM

n (

n=

1 to

10)

16 Stützstellen5 time gments

0) PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10) PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10) PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10) R PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER

VA

LUE

n.1

n

eg.G

r. f

or P

VO

>V

ALU

En.

1=

VA

LUE

n.0

pos

.Gr.

for

PV

O<

VA

LUE

n.1

VA

LUE

n.1

m

oves

in T

IME

n.1

from

=

VA

LUE

n.0

PV

O t

o V

ALU

En.

1

Sta

rt s

etpo

int

0 (s

tart

tim

e se

gmen

t 1)

. F

or C

ON

FI/P

RO

GR

AM

ME

R/B

01/Q

n=0

the

Pro

gram

sta

rts

with

thi

s se

tpoi

nt a

nd

mov

es a

s ra

mp

to V

ALU

E n

.1.

For

CO

NF

I /P

RO

GR

AM

ME

R/B

01/Q

n=1

the

prog

ram

st

arts

with

the

set

poin

t be

eing

the

act

ual

proc

ess

valu

e P

V0

and

mov

es a

s ra

mp

to

VA

LUE

n.

1. T

he v

alue

of t

he g

radi

ent

is

then

: G

rad

=I(V

ALU

En.

1-V

ALU

En.

0)

/TIM

En.

0I t

he b

elow

tab

le is

val

id.

183

r g

64T

OL

.SE

G15

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

15

PROPA


min

.m

ax.

de

sc

rip

tio

nm

axi-

mu

m

reso

-lu

tio

n

1.menu2.menu

pa

ram

ete

r n

um

be

ru

sese

ttin

un

itfa

cto

ry s

etti

ng

ran

ge

tex

t

32S

EG

ME

NT

_ B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 1)

4 bi

nary

tra

cks

33S

EG

ME

NT

2_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 2)

Def

ault

valu

e=0

34S

EG

ME

NT

3_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 3)

35S

EG

ME

NT

4_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 4)

36S

EG

ME

NT

5_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 5)

37S

EG

ME

NT

6_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 6)

38S

EG

ME

NT

7_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 7)

39S

EG

ME

NT

8_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 8)

none

1

40S

EG

ME

NT

9_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 9)

41S

EG

ME

NT1

0_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 10

)

42S

EG

ME

NT1

1_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 11

)

43S

EG

ME

NT1

2_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 12

)

44S

EG

ME

NT1

3_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 13

)

45S

EG

ME

NT1

4_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 14

)

46S

EG

ME

NT1

5_B

INB

inar

y tr

ack

(tim

e se

gmen

t 15

)

47P

GR

.LO

OP

_BE

GF

rom

tim

e se

gmen

t1

14no

ne1

1

48P

RG

.LO

OP

_EN

Dup

to

time

segm

ent

215

none

115

49#

OF

LO

OP

SN

umbe

r of

loop

exe

cutio

ns1

9999

none

11

50T

OL

.SE

G1

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

1

51T

OL

.SE

G2

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

2

52T

OL

.SE

G3

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

3

53T

OL

.SE

G4

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

4

54T

OL

.SE

G5

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

5

55T

OL

.SE

G6

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

6

56T

OL

.SE

G7

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

70

9999

9E

U1

9999

9

57T

OL

.SE

G8

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

8

58T

OL

.SE

G9

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

9

59T

OL

.SE

G10

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

10

60T

OL

.SE

G11

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

11

61T

OL

.SE

G12

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

12

62T

OL

.SE

G13

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

13

63T

OL

.SE

G14

Tol

eran

ce s

egm

ent

14

ToleranceLoops

0 =

he

xade

c2#

0000

15 =

hexa

dec

2# I

I I

I

Binary tracks (see also CONFI/LOOPm/B11/Q10 to Q13)

GRAM n (n=1 to 10) PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10)

Is t

he d

evia

tion

betw

een

the

PV

an

d th

e pr

ogra

mm

er S

P

bigg

er t

han

the

adju

sted

to

lera

nce,

the

pr

ogra

m w

ill b

e fr

ozen

unt

il th

e P

V r

each

es t

he

tole

ranc

e to

the

pr

ogra

mm

er

SP

.

PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10) PROGRAM n (n=1 to 10) PARAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER PA

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

value

track4 track3 track2track1

0 0

0

0

0 0

0

I0

0

I 0

0 0

I

I0

I

0

00

I

0

I0

I

I

00

I

I

II

0

0 0

I 0

0

II

0

I 0

I 0

I

II

I

0

0

I I

0

I

I I

I

0I

I

I

I

RAMETER PARAMETER PARAMETER

42/61-10010 EN

20 Error codes

emory will be indicated in the top line of the

he error. Refer to 20.1.1 and 20.1.2 for a de-ended steps. If the characters “xy“ appear inrror is available in table19-1.

ct the manufacturer and provide the following

184 Digitric 100, Chapter 20 "Error codes"

20.1 Device errorsErrors occurring during read or write actions in the non-volatile flash mdisplay with the message

!Error ....where the four periods represent the four-digit error code assigned to tscription of the respective errors, the possible reasons, and the recommthe error code, this means that a detailed description of the respective e

If none of the recommended steps can solve your problem, please containformation:– instrument version– firmware version– IBIS_ R/IBIS_ R+ revision– actions taken– configuration– project– error code

185

20.1.1 Error codes

ommended steps

device to factory setting and repeat down-d after approximately 2 minutes.

device to factory setting and repeat down-d after approximately 2 minutes

uce configuration and try again

rm manufacturer.

rm manufacturer.

rm manufacturer.

rm manufacturer.

rm manufacturer.

rm manufacturer.

urn device to manufacturer for repair.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 20 "Error codes"

Error code Description Rec

32 Configuration download failed. Setloa

3100 Not enough flash memory available for saving the configuration data.

Setloaorred

3200, 3201 Internal processing action failed. Info

41xy Error when saving the project header. Info

42xy Error when saving the list configuration. Info

43xy, 44xy Error when saving the project version data. Info

45yx Error when saving the hardware configuration. Info

47xy

48xy Error when saving changes of the online param-eters.

Info

49xy

61xy Project header cannot be read.

62xy List configuration cannot be read.

63xy Project version data cannot be read.

64xy

65xy Hardware configuration cannot be read.

68xy Changes of the online parameters cannot be read.

69xy

80xy General hardware error. Ret

81xy Flash memory cannot be initialized completely.

42/61-10010 EN

82xy Flash memory completely erased due to serious


Fig. 20-1 Device error codes

error.

83xy84xy85xy86xy87xy

187

20.1.2 Error details


Fig. 20-2 Error details

xy Error description (valid for the device flash memory)

0 CRC error when reading a block.

1 No free block found when writing.

2 Function call with invalid block number.

3 Function call with too big address offset.

4 Flash memory fault.

5 Flash memory does not exist.

6 (Memory) block not found.

7 Specified file not found.

8 (Memory) block cannot be deleted.

9 Power-fail

10 Power-fail in the initialization phase.

20 (Memory) block contents cannot be deleted.

21 - 24, 29 Uncorrectable write error.

30 No free memory space available.

31 -34, 36,39

Internal error

38 Requested service is not supported

42/61-10010 EN

20.2 Error codes of the controller selftune routineeen 1 and 5.

ommended steps

tart selftuning.

tart selftuning.

configurable change of the output variable uld be increased.

ck the connection and configuration of the suring values for possible errors. errors can be found, the controlled system

not be identified due to a dead time that is too .

the selftuning routine and set the control to “manual“ mode. Wait until the controlled ems do no longer change “noticeably“, then art selftuning.


Errors are output in the form S.Par.Err.X, where X is an error code betw

Table 20-1 Error codes of controller selftuning

Error code Error description Rec

1 General errorThe requirements for trouble-free selftuning are not fully met. However, the reason for this cannot be determined exactly.

Res

2 Noise bandThe noise band automatically determined in the initial phase of the selftuning routine turned out to be too small. This may happen if disturbances in-crease while the selftuning procedure is in progress.

Res

3 Changes of the controlled variableThe controlled system does not change suffi-ciently to permit proper analysis of its behavior.

Thesho

4 Time-outWithin a given time of 10 hours there were no changes of the controlled system.

ChemeaIf nocanlong

5 No damping No damping of the controlled system occurred within the given time window. However, to be able to identify the controlled system, it must be stationary.

Exitloopsystrest

189

20.3 Error codes of the input/output level

d outputs. If any errors are detected, they are

ecommended steps

he input can be recalibrated via the frontanel by using the respective signal transmit-ers.

ee E_AI01CONF 3

ee E_AI01CONF 3

ee E_AI02CONF 3

alibration through the manufacturer equired.

ee E_BIOCONF 3


Upon power on the device checks the calibrated values for the inputs anindicated as plain text (see table).

Table 20-2 Error codes of the input/output level

Error code Error description R

E_AI01CONF 3 At least one calibrated value of AI01 has vio-lated the low limit.

Only the values required according to theAI01-F01 configuration are checked here.

Tpt

E_AI01CONF 4 At least one calibrated value of AI01 has vio-lated the high limit.

Only the values required according to theAI01-F01 configuration are checked here.

s

E_AI02CONF 3 At least one calibrated value of AI02 has vio-lated the low limit.

s

E_AI02CONF 4 At least one calibrated value of AI02 has vio-lated the high limit.

s

E_BIOCONF 3 At least one calibrated value from BIO01 toDO05 has violated the low limit.

Cr

E_BIOCONF 4 At least one calibrated value from BIO01 toDO05 has violated the high limit.

s

42/61-10010 EN

21 Technical data

pensation0, 20, 50 or 60 °C

ion± 1 °C/10 K

ure 22 °C ± 1 °Ce 0...50 °C

gction

ermometer Pt100 DIN

0.0 °C0.0 °C

e circuit to 40 Ω line resistanceare

etrical lines up to 3 x 10 Ω

letransmitter (potentiometer)

1.5 kΩ (0.75...2 kΩ)

mAe thermometer

190 Digitric 100, Chapter 21 "Technical data"

Inputs

Common data:without electronical isolationResolution ≤ 0.01 %Accuracy (referred to nominal range) ≤ 0.2 %Temperature effects ≤ 0.2 %/10 °CHardware input filter limit frequency 7 Hz

Analog:Universal input AI01connected to internal device ground

used for standard signal0/4...20 mA at 50 Ω ±1 %

Overcurrent/polarity reversal protectionup to ± 40 mA

Linearization, square-rootingconfigurable

at 4...20 mA Line break monitoring with configurable reaction

used for thermocouplesTypes Temperature Voltage Typical

range range accuracyJ -200...1200 °C 77.43 mV ≤ 0.2 %E -200...1000 °C 85.18 mV ≤ 0.2 %K -200...1400 °C 61.53 mV ≤ 0.2 %L -200...1000 °C 78.21 mV ≤ 0.2 %U -200... 600 °C 40.00 mV ≤ 0.3 %R -200...1700 °C 20.22 mV ≤ 0.5 %S -200...1800 °C 18.72 mV ≤ 0.5 %T -200... 400 °C 26.47 mV ≤ 0.4 %B -200...1800 °C 13.24 mV ≤ 0.6 %D -200...2300 °C 36.92 mV ≤ 0.4 %

Reference junction cominternal or external:

Internal reference junctError limitReference temperatAmbient temperatur

Sensor break monitorinwith configurable rea

Used for resistance th

Measuring range-200.0...+20-200.0...+80

Measuring current≤ 1 mA

Measuring circuit: 2-wirLine balancing: by softw

3-wire circuit: for symm

used for resistance teMeasuring ranges

150 Ω, (75...200 Ω);

Measuring current: ≤ 1 other data as resistanc

191

Optional universal input 2 (AI02) Outputs

smission750 Ω, short-circuit and open-circuit proof

t (B03/B04/B05)3 A resistive load≥ 100 mACdO

red

units:99:9 hours, four digital tracks

ection to PC with fixed telegram formattting and configuration program IBIS-R+0 EN).ordering information. Bus capable RS 485ee modules)

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 21 "Technical data"

with integrated transmitter power supplyInput for mA, Pt100, thermocouple or potentiometer, technical dataas AI01, but with electronical isolation.

Permissible common-mode voltage against device ground± 4 V DC

Permissible differential-mode voltage Uss (50 Hz)50 mV

Transmitter power supplyoutput voltage 20...25 V DC, 50 mA

Short-circuit proofautomatic cut off on overload

binary:2 binary inputs/outputs (B01/B02)

Direct/reverse function configurable

Switching frequency ≤ 8 Hz

Analog output AO01galvanical isolated

Control output or retran0/4...20 mA at max.

Control range0...≥ 21 mA

Load-dependency0.1 %/100 Ω

Resolution≥ 0.01 %

binary:see inputs

3 relays with NO contacfor max. 250 V AC, for min. ≥ 12 V AC, Contact material Ag

Programmer

10 programs can be stoeach program:15 segmentsSet point in physicalSegment time 0...99

Serial interfaces

TTL interface for connmatching parameter se(see Data Sheet 62-6.7For adapter cable see interface retrofittable (s

InputDIN 19240

Rated signalV DC

Voltage range(V)

Current range

Rated level 24 20.4...28.8 approx. 1 mA

1-signal 24 13.0...30.2 approx. 1 mA

0-signal 0 - 3.0... 5.0 < 0.2 mA

OutputDIN 19240

Rated signalV DC

Voltage range(V)

Current range

Rated level 24 ext. 20.4...28.8 100 mA

1-signal 24 13.0...30.2 0...max. mA

0-signal 0 - 3.0... 5.0 0...0.15 mA

192 Digitric 100, Chapter 21 "Technical data" 42/61-10010 EN

CPU dataMeasured value and correction value resolution

≤ 0.01 %

Cycle timeapprox. 100 ms

Configuration and data backupFlash-EPROM

Power supply115 to 230 V AC (90...260 V), 47...63 Hz

Power consumption:Max. 13.3 VA (11 W)Power failure bridging ≥ 150 ms at ≥ 180 V AC

24 V UC24 V DC -25...+30 %,

residual ripple ≤ ± 3 Vss

24 V AC -15...+10 %, 47...63 HzPower consumption:Max. 15 VA (12 W)Power failure bridging ≥ 20 ms at 0.85 x Unom

Power factor cosϕ = 0.7

SafetyThe device needs no external safety of power supply

Environmental conditionsClimatic class

3K3 to EN 60721-3-3

Ambient temperature0...50 °C

Storage and transport temperature-20...70 °C

Relative humidity< 85 %, short-term to 95 %, no condensation

Minimum atmospheric pressure80 kPa

Electromagnetic compatibilityMeets protection requirements of EMC directive 89/336/EEC, 5/89

Interference resistance EN 61326-1

Interference emission EN 50081-1, 1/92(referred to: EN 55011, class B)Max. interference resistance, if device is mounted in a metalpanel

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 21 "Technical data" 193

Connection, case, safetyDegree of protection to DIN EN 60529

Front panel: IP 65Case: IP 30Terminals: IP 20

Electrical safety

Class of protection 1 to EN 61010 T.1 (VDE 0411 T.1, March1994)

Clearances and creepage distances as per EN for overvoltagecategory 3, degree of contamination 2

All inputs and outputs, including the interface and the transmitterfeed but excepting all relay outputs are functional extra-low volt-age circuits to DIN VDE 0100, part 410. The safe isolation ofthese circuits meets the requirements to DIN VDE 0106, part 101.

Mechanical stress features

to DIN IEC 68, part 2-27 and 68-2-6Shock 30 g/18 ms; Vibration 2 g/0.15 mm/5...150 Hz

Case dimensionsFront panel 96 mm x 96 mmInstalled depth 145 mm

Panel cutout92 mm x 92 mm to DIN 43700

Mountingin panelHorizontal high-density construction possibleVertical spacing 36 mmFixing with straining screws

Electrical connections

Plug-in screw terminalsfor wire or stranded wire to 1.5 mm2, coded

Power supply2.5 mm2

No shielded cables required – except for interface leads

Mounting orientationany

Weightapprox. 600 g without modulesadditional module approx. 40 gadditional relay module approx. 80 g

Scope of supply and delivery

2 straining screws (integrated in case), Operating Manual andplug-in screw terminals

ModulesOne of the modules listed below can be plugged in for extendingthe I/O or for using digital communication.

42/61-10010 EN

Analog inputs Module 4_mV =AE4_mV for thermocouples

ctronical isolation

V

ode voltage ≤ ± 4 V against device ground

mode voltage 50 mVss

± 10 Vut and ground ± 50 V

pensationl or external 0, 20, 50 or 60 °C

le like AI01

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8AE4_MV

E


Module AI4_mA=AE4_mA for standard signals

4 inputs0/4...20 mA electronically isolated

Input resistance approx. 50 ΩSignal resolution ≤ 0.01 % for 20 mA

Permissible common-mode voltage ≤ ± 4 V against device ground

Permissible differential-mode voltage 50 mVss

Destruction proofInput current < 50 mAVoltage between input and ground ± 50 V

4 inputs-10...80 mV, with ele

Signal resolution20.000 for -10...80 m

Input resistanceapprox. 5 MΩ

Permissible common-m

Permissible differential-

Destruction proofVoltage at one inputVoltage between inp

Break monitoringconfigurable reaction

Reference junction comconfigurable, interna

Linearization configurab

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8AE4_MA

+

+

+

+

-

-

-

-

A

195

Module AI2_mA/mV-OI=AE2_mA/mV_TR Module AI4_PT_2W=AE4_PT_2L for RTD 2-wires

ircuit

mode voltage: : 100 mVss

% for 400 Ω mA

urable

are

-circuit monitoring

AE4_PT-2L

F1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8


for mA signals or thermocouple with electrical isolation

2 inputs with electrical isolation0/4...20 mA or -10...80 mV (changeable by means of jumpers)

Input resistance at20 mA: 25 Ω; -10...80 mV: approx. 5 MΩ

Dielectric strength of input and output leads against each otherand against grounded conductor:

Test voltage 500 V ACContinuous operation 45 V AC

Technical data as modules 4_MV or 4_MA

4 inputsfor Pt100 in 2-wire c

Range: 0...400 ΩPermissible differential

Signal resolution ≤ 0.01

Measuring current ≤ 1.5

Measuring range config-200.0...+200.0 °C-200.0...+450.0 °C-200.0...+800.0 °C

Line balancing by softw

Sensor break and shortconfigurable reaction

AE2_MA/MV_TR

B1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

42/61-10010 EN

Module AI2_PT_3/4W=AE2_PT_3/4L for RTD 3-/4-wires

inary inputs; O = binary outputs

signal Voltage range(V)

Current range

20.4...28.8 approx. 3 mA

13.0...30.2 approx. 3 mA

-3.0...5.0 ≤ 0.1 mA

signal Voltage range(V)

Current range

20.4...28.8 100 mA

13.0...30.2 0...max. mA

-3.0...5.0 0...0.1 mA

BI1/BO1

BI2/BO2

BI3/BO3

BI4/BO4

BI5/BO5

BI6/BO6

BEA6-BIN

M

1

+

2

3

4

5

6

-


2 inputsfor Pt100 in 3- or 4-wire circuit or potentiometer

Technical data for Pt100 as module AI4_PT_2_W

Potentiometer R150: 0...150 Ω Series resistance: 0...500 Measuring current < 1.5 mAPotentiometer R1500: 0...1500 ΩSeries resistance: 0...1500 Ω Measuring current < 0.5 mA

Binary inputs/outputs

Module BIO6_BIN=BE06_BIN

6 binary inputs/outputs, opto isolatedConfigurable as input or output, direct or reverse action

*) Connection example: I = bAE2_PT-3/4L

G1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

InputDIN 19240

Rated V DC

Rated level 24

1-signal 24

0-signal 0

OutputDIN 19240

Rated V DC

Rated level 24 ext

1-Signal 24

0-Signal 0

O*

I*24 V DC

24 V DC

(-)

(+)

(+)

197

Module BO4_REL=BA4_REL Range: 0...20.000 pulses/cycle time µs

ngle (1 input)ulses µs

cording to DIN 19234Ui = 9.5 VRi = 1 kΩL = 0...1.2 mA/H = 2.1...4.0 mA

cording to DIN 19240 (0/24 V DC)RE > 6 kΩL = -3...5 V/H = 13...20.2 V

L (0/5 V DC)RE > 6 kΩL = 0...0.8 V/H = 3.5...24 V

19,5 V DC

9,5 V DC2

4

3

5

6

7

8AE4_F

H

0/5 V

0/5 V

0/5 V

0/5 V

0/24 V

0/24 V

0/24 V

0/24 V

NAMUR

NAMUR


4 relayswith NO contact for max. 250 V AC, 1 A resistive load

Built-in spark-quenching: 0.022 µF + 100 ΩFor max. 250 V, max. 1 A at cosϕ = 0.9

Contact material AgCdO

Module AI4_F=AE4_F

4 inputs for:

Frequency (1/4 inputs)Range 1 input 0...20 kHzRange 4 inputs 0...10 kHzSignal resolution 1 Hz

Period (1-4 inputs)Range 0...20 sSignal resolution 1 ms

Pulses (1-4 inputs)/ incremental angle (2 inputs)

min. pulse length: 50

Absolute incremental aRange: 0...20.000 pmin. pulse length: 50

Types of input signals:

Max. 2 Namur inputs acOpen circuit voltageInternal resistanceSignal range

Max. 4 digital inputs acInput resistanceSignal range

Max. 4 digital inputs TTInput resistanceSignal range

Accuracy: ± 0.1 %

Rel.1

Rel.4

Rel.3

Rel.2

BA4_REL

T1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

(-)

(+)

(+)

(+)

(+)

42/61-10010 EN

/DP-V1 (Slave)

nal capabilities of DIN 19245, parts 1 to 4. 1.5 MBaud.r see accessories on page 10

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

A (+)

B (-)

1)

RS-232RS-485U

RS-232

RS-485

1,2 Tx

3,4 Rx

5,6

Profibus

CPU

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

1)

Z

VCC


Analog outputs

Module AO3_mA=AA3_mA

Triple current output 0/4...20 mA at 750 ΩSignal resolution ≤ 0.02 % for 20 mALoad dependency 0.1 %/100 ΩOutput monitoring, reaction configurable

Module AO3_V=AA3_V

Triple voltage output 0/2...10 V ≥ 5 kΩ

Interface modules

Module RS 485 or RS 232

Interface module in accordance with RS 485 or RS 232 specifica-tion. Electrically isolated. Standard protocol: MODBUS-RTU.

Module PROFIBUS-DP

Module with full functioTransmission rate up toBus terminating adapte

AA3-VAA3_MA

N(mA)P(V)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

RS-485/232

+

-

RS-485

199

22 Packaging for transport or return to the manufacturer

in a padded plastic film or corrugated paperng material (e.g. foam rubber). The thicknessnd the type of shipment.

p the device and the desiccant bag in a heat-e packing volume and the expected transporter of union paper.

42/61-10010 EN Digitric 100, Chapter 22 "Packaging for transport or return to the manufacturer"

If the original packing material is no longer available, wrap Digitric 100board and place it in a box of sufficient size lined with a shock-absorbiof the shock-absorber should be in accordance with the device weight a

The box must be handled with care and has to be labeled accordingly.

For overseas shipment always add a desiccant (e.g. silica gel) and wrasealed polyethylene foil of 0.2 mm. Adapt the amount of desiccant to thtime (at least sufficient for 3 months). Additionally line the box with a lay

ABB Automation Products GmbHHöseler Platz 2, D-42579 HeiligenhausPhone +49(0)20 56 12 - 5181; Fax +49(0)20 56 12 - 5081http://www.abb.com

Subject to technical changesPrinted in the Fed. Rep. of Germany

42/61-10010 EN Rev. 01Edition 10.01

Digitric 100 Versatile, universal controller for all ... - ABB

Documents

Transcript of Digitric 100 Versatile, universal controller for all ... - ABB